Opportunities

View All & Sort By:

Environmental/Geo/Agriculture (11)

  • Lighting Distribution & Maintenance with 3,000+ Active Clients

    The owner of this business is absentee; the management team and staff are committed to staying on board post-sale! This full-service lighting provider has mastered design, distribution, installation, maintenance, and repair since 1998. With a 9,600 sq. ft. headquarters in Phoenix, Arizona and one satellite branch, this business continues to meet the needs of over 3,000 active clients nationwide. The majority of customers are in the United States (90%), while 5% of clients are located in Canada and another 5% are in Central America.  The staff is well-trained, and many employees have been with the company for 5-20 years. Team members include a sales department, a solid warehouse staff, a knowledgeable management team, and 1099 contractors are hired as needed.  The management team is planning to stay on, ensuring continuity of operations. 

     

    Working with commercial and industrial businesses is the focus of this company. Large restaurant chains, hotels, multi-family housing projects, universities, and industrial customers are only the beginning of the diverse and impressive client list that results in steady work throughout the year. Providing excellent customer service, they seek to buy and sell products at the lowest price possible.  Due to their approach, they can provide products and services for far less than their competition. 

     

    At the purchase price of 1,785,000 and a solid management team and staff in place, the transition for a new owner should be incredibly seamless. Expanding electrical services and improving online presence by adding online ordering would certainly lead to revenue growth. 

    PRICE $1,785,000 CASH FLOW $406,940

  • Industrial Cleaning and Maintenance — 90% Collateralized

    This oil field service company specializes in turnaround and industrial cleaning services for oil, gas and utility companies and is 90% collateralized! Handling all aspects for the disposal of drilling waste in the oil and gas sector, this company currently has 250 clients with 50 of those recurring. 70% of their revenue comes from turnaround and industrial cleaning services; the other 30% is a mixture of maintenance, water delivery, vegetation control, water truck services, mobile steaming and equipment rentals. Personnel includes 1 Regional Manager, 1 Dispatcher, 1 Safety Officer, 1 Mechanic, 2 Junior Mechanics, 1 Shop Hand/Assistant, and 15-22 Operators/Assistants. The 2 owners work remotely doing general business oversight and accounting & payroll management. Their vast array of high-quality equipment is comprised of hydro vacs, combo vacs, tank trucks, straight vacs, water trucks, mobile steamers, pressure trucks, and maintenance units. The business is COR Certified, Comply Works Certified, and belongs to ISNetworld.

    The company’s leased space consists of an 11-acre industrial fully fenced yard site, a 750 sq. ft. office with 4 maintenance bays, and a 5-bedroom crew house.

    Promoting their one-stop-shop service, hiring a salesperson, increasing truck utilization, and expanding into neighboring communities would undoubtedly grow the business and increase revenue.

    Some key information:

    • Tremendous signage, word-of-mouth referrals, and a rock-solid reputation gives this company a firm grasp on the area.
    • 70% of the company’s revenue comes from turnaround and industrial cleaning services.
    • This company currently has 250 clients with 50 of those recurring.
    At the purchase price of $2,875,000 CAD, this business is 90% collateralized.

    PRICE $2,875,000 CASH FLOW $1,002,929

  • Asbestos Abatement, Fireproofing, and Demolition Services

    With nearly $5M in sales in 2020, this environmental remediation business has been established in upstate New York since 2012! In addition to asbestos removal (60%), they also provide lead remediation, interior and structural demolition (20%), and spray-on fireproofing (20%).  Most business is accomplished in Upstate New York (85%), with the remaining work completed in the New York City area.  Customers include government organizations, state agencies, general contractors, construction managers, property managers, and property owners.  Project timelines are from a few weeks to a several months long and most contracts (85%) are earned through a request for proposal process.  Opportunities are plentiful for growth in the New York City Area as well as widening the service area to include New Jersey, Pennsylvania, or additional regions of New York.

     

    The company operates from a small office and warehouse space.  Purchasing and storing large amounts of equipment is not necessary as this business rents any large items needed to complete projects and houses very few assets on site.  All inventory and materials are ordered by project and may be briefly stored by this business or drop-shipped to the work site. 

     

    Nearly 95% of all work is completed in-house by a team of five to twenty-five floating laborers.  Rarely subcontractors are utilized for large projects or those at long distances.  Supporting this team are two supervisors, one accountant, and one team assistant.  Priced at $975,000, a 12.5% down payment returns $183,991 in the first year after debt payments – a 151% return on investment!

    PRICE $975,000 CASH FLOW $308,677

  • Fire Protection System Engineering Firm – 60% Profit Margin

    With year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations!  Established for over 25 years, this fire protection engineering firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The Senior Consultant has over 20 years of experience in the fire protection industry and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $4,775,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $4,775,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial Roofing Services – over $13.5M in Sales

    With over $13.5M in sales in 2020, this roofing & sheet metal company has over 70 employees in place! Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. With expertise in membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work, this business has considerable repeat business with general contractors, construction managers, and owners in the area. Their diversified client base includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,525,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,525,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Structural & Offsite Civil Engineering with 70+ Recurring Clients

    With a 4-year average profit margin of 63%, this structural & offsite civil engineering firm has $1.1M in sales in the first 5 months of 2021! The sellers of this well-established firm will roll 20% equity and stay on board for up to 5 years. The majority of their 70+ recurring clients have been with them for a minimum of 8 years. Their client base is comprised of contractors, developers, architects, engineers, and owner-builders, Established since 2006, approximate sale size ranges from $20k-$60k for residential projects and $2k-$3k for the offsite civil structures. The hot residential market in Las Vegas has propelled this firm’s business to focus and specialize in custom, tract, and multifamily homes, as well as offsite civil structures. The team includes the 3 owners, who are licensed professional engineers (CE), 1 Senior Project Manager, 1 Drafter, and 2 regular professionals subcontracted as needed. The new owner would not need to be a licensed engineer; there would just need to be one on staff to stamp the drawings, designs, plans, etc.  

     

    The firm works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. building with 7 offices, a conference room, meeting room, IT room, and a bullpen with 6-cubicle workstations and a production area. The owners of the business also own the building (through a separate entity) and lease it to themselves for $7,000/month. (A fair market rate for rent would be in the $4,000/month range.)

     

    Priced at $6,350,000, the growth potential for this firm is substantial. With the constant influx of population, the Las Vegas construction market is booming with design demand in every sector. This demand yields several untapped markets in the region that this firm simply does not currently have the manpower to explore. A larger firm looking to expand into this hot market, or an existing firm that offers different services, could seamlessly merge with this versatile and well-recognized company to increase market share, and exponentially boost revenue. Having established a great reputation, this firm’s current marketing practice consists entirely of word-of-mouth advertising. So, updating their website, creating a social media presence, and implementing a marketing strategy could also lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $6,350,000 CASH FLOW $2,005,536

  • Sewer Pipeline Inspections in Honolulu with 55% Profit Margin

    With over $2M in sales in the last 12 months and nearly $2M in assets, this sewer pipeline inspection company in Honolulu has been established for over 15 years! Specializing in CCTV inspections of pipelines, their top-notch equipment and vehicles allow their well-trained PACP-certified staff to meet the needs of their client base, 90% of which consists of engineers for construction companies, municipalities, or consulting engineers. They also provide manhole/corrosion inspections, smoke testing, flow monitoring, and sewer/pipeline cleaning. Over $1M worth of vehicles including 3 CCTV trucks, 3 cleaning combo trucks, and 4 pickup trucks are part of the nearly $2M in business assets, as well $500k worth of generators, hand tools, computer equipment, and camera equipment, making the bank loan nearly 50% collateralized. The team consists of 10 full-time employees, including 1 Director of Operations, 1 Quality Control Supervisor, 1 Salesperson, and high skilled CCTV and Vactor Operators and field technicians. The owner currently manages business development, accounting, operations, administration, and IT and is willing to stay on for 2-3 years post-sale to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    The company’s average sale size is approximately $20k, with an average of 10 work orders per month. Currently, the business has $478k worth of work in their pipeline. The company was deemed essential during COVID, allowing them to increase their rates due to the increase in the need for PPE gear and adding trucks to accommodate social distancing guidelines.

     

    Priced at $4,025,000 and with a well-established reputation already in place, a new owner could easily boost sales by pursuing other areas in the general industry, such as construction and storm sewer system services. A 12.5% down payment of $503,125 returns $487,883 in the first year after debt payments – a 97% return on investment!

    PRICE $4,025,000 CASH FLOW $1,155,757

  • Environmental Consulting Services with $2.7M in Backlog

    With $2.7M in backlog, this environmental and engineering service provider has been serving developers, engineers, manufacturers, and municipalities since 1985! A highly trained team of 41 employees are in place, including 9 managers. Split into service groups, their qualified personnel are trained and certified as environmental professionals, mold inspectors, asbestos inspectors, asbestos management planners, professional geologists, brownfield redevelopment specialists, professional wetland scientists, underground storage tank professionals, remediation specialists, hazardous materials managers, and regulatory compliance managers. The owner/president would stay on for 1 year to aid in the transition, but for the right fit, would continue in sales/mediation for up to 10 years.

     

    Completing aver 12,000 projects in 28 states, mostly east of the Mississippi, this company has also done work in Mexico, Canada, and Eastern Europe. A continued area of growth is to expand the service concentration outside Michigan. Their work in process is nearly $840k, with a strong stream of work coming in.

     

    This company’s corporate headquarters is located in Brighton, Michigan. But there are additional offices located in Grand Rapids, Detroit, and Trenton. They even currently have a missionary office in Lexington, Kentucky out of a staff person’s home. At the purchase price of $3,195,000, a 12.5% down payment of $399,375 returns $389,992 in the first year after debt payments. That is a 97% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,195,000 CASH FLOW $879,305

  • Environmental Services for Commercial Clientele

    Passive ownership with 37 skilled employees in Washington! Located in the Seattle, Washington area, these specialists in the environmental industry have earned a 25% profit margin in 2018 and continue to experience year-over-year growth.  Asbestos removal (40%), interior demolition (40%), as well as mold and lead remediation (20%) are the main services offered by this company.  Commercial clients account for 80% of annual contract revenues, with residential projects producing 20%.  Clients include The Federal Government, Washington State Universities and schools, local municipalities, and health care facilities.  Day-to-day operations are led by a tenured vice president with management oversight of two administrative assistants, three estimators with project management experience, three operations managers, seven supervisors and the workforce.  The owner currently leads in a consultant capacity mentoring and developing leadership staff while also ensuring bonding and insurance.

     

    With a total of 9,300 square feet of space, the headquarters has ample room to further expand operations.  The office is 2,800 square feet and features five private offices, a reception area, a large conference room used for meetings, training, and environmental records storage.   The warehouse and shop span 6,500 square feet of indoor space allowing for staging, tool and inventory storage, and warehouse management.  An expansive paved lot and gravel yard of two acres house all heavy equipment, vehicles, disposal containers, and trailers.  Assets comprise all equipment necessary for safe testing, handling, and removal of hazardous materials.

     

    Strong revenue generating initiatives could be achieved by increasing the workforce to take on contracts currently sacrificed, driving growth of the container rental business, and utilizing targeted advertising to generate new contacts.

    PRICE $5,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,112,023

  • Environmental & Biological Firm with a 36% Profit Margin

    This full-service environmental advisory firm has 80% private clients & public agencies and 20% federal government contracts and over 25 years of experience! Specializing in the preparation of CEQA/NEPA documents, biological, regulatory and cultural services, they are known as intellectual leaders in the environmental community. This highly focused team of 23 professionals with decades of experience leads clients through complex local, state and federal agency processes with excellence and maintains their business year over year. The seller is also willing to remain on for 2-4 years. They have a 36% profit margin and $5M in the pipeline!

    They serve a myriad of clients, working on jobs ranging from smaller development projects to $1.8 billion transportation improvements. Clients include builders/developers, cities, counties, water districts, school districts, the State of California, Caltrans, and metropolitan planning organizations throughout Southern California.

    This firm is focused on providing superior service to existing clients, identifying new potential clients and participating in the Women Transportation Seminar, American Planning Association and Association of Environmental Professionals.

    The owner currently works on business development and project/ financial oversight. Growth opportunities include the expansion of cultural and CEQA services as they become leading divisions for the company. 

     

    PRICE $9,225,000 CASH FLOW $1,688,412

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

Architecture/Engineering/Interior Design (19)

  • Mid-Atlantic Architecture Firm with 80+ Employees

    With nearly $17M in sales in 2020, this multi-location architecture firm has a team of 80+ employees in place and the owners will stay on board for 2-10+ years! Established in 1973, the business has a 3-year average cash flow of $2.7M and a 16% average profit margin. Serving regionally in Pennsylvania, Delaware, New Jersey, and Maryland, the firm specializes in in architecture (75%), interior design (20%), and landscape architecture. The majority of their client base is in the private sector, with a significant portion of those being developers for individual corporate clients and higher education. Their highly skilled team of many long-tenured employees includes the 7 owners, 20 Registered Architects, 6 Senior Architectural Designers, 20 Intern Architects, 14 Interior Designers, 2 in Landscape Architecture, and 9 Operations Associates; all staff members serve firm-wide functions. The owners have identified five future leaders of the firm, as well as additional staff who they believe have the aptitude to grow into leadership roles in the future.

     

    The firm is known for providing top-notch architecture and design services in the area for 47 years.  Due to the diversity of the market sectors they serve, they fared exceptionally well in 2020 compared to some of their peers who are more specialized. Their 2020 revenue nearly matched 2019, and with the help of a PPP loan that was 100% forgiven, they were able to maintain their staff level with no reduced hours or furloughs.

    Priced at $11,640,000, there is immense growth potential through a smaller bolt-on acquisition, and a new owner could expand the market share in healthcare and senior living. The current owners want to establish an economically sustainable model for the purchase of shares from the three principals who will reach retirement age within the next 3 to 7 years. A sale could also provide the opportunity for enhanced growth.

    PRICE $11,640,000 CASH FLOW $2,720,030

  • Structural & Offsite Civil Engineering with 70+ Recurring Clients

    With a 4-year average profit margin of 63%, this structural & offsite civil engineering firm has $1.1M in sales in the first 5 months of 2021! The sellers of this well-established firm will roll 20% equity and stay on board for up to 5 years. The majority of their 70+ recurring clients have been with them for a minimum of 8 years. Their client base is comprised of contractors, developers, architects, engineers, and owner-builders, Established since 2006, approximate sale size ranges from $20k-$60k for residential projects and $2k-$3k for the offsite civil structures. The hot residential market in Las Vegas has propelled this firm’s business to focus and specialize in custom, tract, and multifamily homes, as well as offsite civil structures. The team includes the 3 owners, who are licensed professional engineers (CE), 1 Senior Project Manager, 1 Drafter, and 2 regular professionals subcontracted as needed. The new owner would not need to be a licensed engineer; there would just need to be one on staff to stamp the drawings, designs, plans, etc.  

     

    The firm works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. building with 7 offices, a conference room, meeting room, IT room, and a bullpen with 6-cubicle workstations and a production area. The owners of the business also own the building (through a separate entity) and lease it to themselves for $7,000/month. (A fair market rate for rent would be in the $4,000/month range.)

     

    Priced at $6,350,000, the growth potential for this firm is substantial. With the constant influx of population, the Las Vegas construction market is booming with design demand in every sector. This demand yields several untapped markets in the region that this firm simply does not currently have the manpower to explore. A larger firm looking to expand into this hot market, or an existing firm that offers different services, could seamlessly merge with this versatile and well-recognized company to increase market share, and exponentially boost revenue. Having established a great reputation, this firm’s current marketing practice consists entirely of word-of-mouth advertising. So, updating their website, creating a social media presence, and implementing a marketing strategy could also lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $6,350,000 CASH FLOW $2,005,536

  • OKC Structural Engineering Firm with 23% Profit Margin

    Well-established for 15 years, this Oklahoma City structural engineering firm has a 23% profit margin and 90% recurring client base! There are three engineers and one CAD technician on staff, and the owner is willing to stay on for 2 years. They also work in partnership with a contracted firm that has five to six drafters and five to six engineers at any one time.  This remote team is wholly dedicated to the work of the primary company. Their clients are 100% commercial, with their work including institutional buildings, warehouses, retail shopping centers, schools, gymnasiums, churches, and retirement & nursing homes.

     

    Most of this company’s clients are in Oklahoma (95%), but those companies have multiple locations throughout the United States and due to their long-term relationships, the firm handles work for many of those projects.  The owner manages the partnership with the contracted firm, as well as client relationships, general oversight, and has final approval for all plans before they are submitted to the customer.  The company utilizes 2,600 square feet of space in a local office building.  This space features private offices, an open work area, and a conference room.  There is room within the building for expansion, if desired.  Assets include office equipment, standard office furniture, and drafting and technical software. 

     

    Priced at $915,000, this firm has tremendous growth opportunities. Expansion may be found in expanding the local customer base, building clients who need an engineering firm with experience working on projects through the US.  Additionally, one could maximize the utilization of the contracted firm to increase capacity and improve margins.

    PRICE $915,000 CASH FLOW $285,220

  • Concrete Landscape Edging in KC – 53% Profit Margin

    With nearly 100% of their work coming from referrals and word of mouth, this decorative concrete installer and specialty garden retailer has seen continued growth since 2016!  With a 53% profit margin in 2020 and a 45% profit margin in 2019, this company designs, installs, and maintains a niche, in demand, and high utility concrete product while also selling and installing specialty garden products related to their other work. 55% of revenues coming from concrete installation, 39% from retail, and the other 6% from subcontracting add-on services that utilize local landscapers and contractors, they have a well-established product line to supply the growing, and legal medical cannabis industry that has a huge potential for growth. Already in March of 2021, YTD retail sales revenue is up 180% and net income is up over $39,000. A very small team of employees has maintained these high margins with a low labor cost. This company has over 2,000 residential concrete clients and thousands of retail store clients, including high repeat clientele. This company closes more than 95% of estimates they perform. This company has strong cash flow and does not have any issues collecting payment, resulting in zero A/R.

     

    The company has many years of experience in a niche specialty growing supplies industry  and has relationships with major vendors and distributors. They are well known for their expertise in this growing specialty industry. This retail category has a huge untapped potential as medical marijuana has just become legal in Missouri. This portion of the business has   exponential growth potential and could possibly be spun off into its own entity with multiple locations as the industry evolves. Also, by adding equipment, personnel and advertising , the concrete side of the business could easily be doubled or tripled with the leadership of a motivated buyer.

     

    At the purchase price of $1,605,000, a 12.5% down payment of $200,625  returns $244,222, which is a 122% return on investment in the first year!

    PRICE $1,605,000 CASH FLOW $449,474

  • Commercial Roofing Services – over $13.5M in Sales

    With over $13.5M in sales in 2020, this roofing & sheet metal company has over 70 employees in place! Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. With expertise in membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work, this business has considerable repeat business with general contractors, construction managers, and owners in the area. Their diversified client base includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,525,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,525,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Full-Service Interior Design in Chicago

    This interior design business boasted over $1.2M in sales in 2020, and 2021 is looking highly profitable with nearly $540k in sales in the first quarter! Located in the Chicago area, this award-winning full-service company is well-known for its client-oriented approach and one-of-a-kind luxury homes, hospitality spaces, and commercial projects. The team of five includes 2 Senior Designers, 1 Junior Designer, 1 Project Manager, and 1 Administrative Assistant. They specialize in kitchen & bathroom remodeling, redesigning living spaces such as great rooms, dining rooms, and bedrooms, and new construction & major remodeling. Projects include furniture plans, selections, fabrics, area rugs, window treatments, lighting, paint, and accessories. Clients include high-end homeowners, business owners, executives, architects, and general contractors.

     

    The team handles approximately 10-12 projects at one time, with the average sale size in the $55k range. Software in use includes Studio Designer, CAD, Minutes Matter, SketchUp, and Revit. Established for over 20 years, the business has an excellent reputation, superior social media reviews, and positive & long-standing relationships with vendors. The owner will stay on board for up to 2 years to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    Priced at $1,100,000, a 10% down payment of $110,000 returns $136,624 in the first year after debt payments – a 124% return on investment. The company is off to a very strong start in 2021 with several large projects on the horizon. A new owner could grow the business by advertising and networking within the community and engaging on social media platforms to generate interest in the company’s design style.

    PRICE $1,100,000 CASH FLOW $283,447

  • Commercial Roofing Company with 90 Employees

    With over $14.5M in sales and 90 W2 employees in place, the project size for this commercial roofing company ranges from $75k to $3.75M! Established for over 20 years and with 100% commercial clients, their focus is on larger industrial and institutional projects. Offering reroofing (50% of their revenue) new construction (40%) and repair & maintenance (10%) within a 75-mile radius of Pittsburgh, this team of 90 employees is comprised of 75 craftsmen and sheet metal workers, along with 15 salaried support staff. Boasting over $14M in sales in 2020, they self-perform 95% of their work, subbing out only as needed based on project size and ancillary services in the contract. Their clientele is a diverse assortment of consultants, general contractors, and private owners; this business is highly sought after in the greater Pittsburgh region.  They currently have 28 jobs that are in various stages of progress. With over $9M in assets, the bank loan is nearly 70% collateralized.

     

    The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-to-month basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The  non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction.

     

    Priced at $13,425,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Pursuing more maintenance work and roofing-related sheet metal projects would certainly increase revenue. With already long-standing client relationships in place, organic growth is inevitable if services are expanded.

    PRICE $13,425,000 CASH FLOW $3,057,717

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Millwork Manufacturing for Churches & Schools with $6.4M in Backlog

    With 30 signed contracts worth $6.4M on the books for 2021, this year is looking to be the most profitable year on record for this custom millwork manufacturing company!  Being considered an essential business, they have not been impacted by COVID. Based in a 10,000 sq. ft. facility with 900k+ in equipment and assets, this custom millwork business is affiliated with all major contractors in Utah. Established for 25 years and licensed in Utah, California, Idaho, New Mexico, and Hawaii, their clients include schools, churches, hospitals, corporate offices, universities, and government buildings, along with some residential work in apartment complexes, homes, and condos. Assets include CNC routers, a horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, state-of-the art bander, table saw, chop saws, timesaver sander, a state-of-the-art spray booth for finish work, plus all of the basic equipment & tools needed for each job. The highly skilled team is comprised of the owner, who handles general oversight, 1 Shop Forman, 2 Project Managers, 1 Estimator, 1 Production Manager, 1 Office Manager, 4 Installers, 10-15 Fabricators, and subcontracted installers as needed.

     

    The business is licensed in Hawaii, which is a major advantage, as there is very little competition; the company has completed $4M worth of work there.  Their reputation has earned them several contracts with top-name businesses, religious affiliations, and area universities.

     

    Priced at $2,900,000, this company is in a prime position for growth!  At max capacity in their current facility, expanding their labor force and facility would lead to incredible revenue growth. There is also strong potential to take over the market share in the region, as many smaller businesses will not survive the pandemic. A 12.5% down payment of $362,500 will return $382,999 in the first year after debt payments – a 106% return on investment.

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $753,860

  • Multi-Engineering Services in Toronto – over $4.6M in Sales

    With over $4.6M in sales and a 31% profit margin in 2020, this Toronto-based engineering consulting firm has seen steady growth over the years. With solid long-term relationships established with their clients throughout Canada, they offer a variety of services including geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring, noise & vibration monitoring, geotechnical engineering & material testing, building design, environmental engineering, civil engineering design & planning, hydrogeological engineering, Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) scanning services, noise impact studying, and construction dust monitoring.  Taking on large, long-term projects for transit authorities, governmental organizations, and general contractors, this company has wide-ranging capabilities creating a consolidated resource for customers to meet their project goals. A focus of the company is on transit systems including tunneling, subway, rail and subway stations, bridges, sewer and water infrastructure, and highways. Their 50 personnel includes professional engineers, architects, subject matter experts, software engineers, surveyors, accounting, and administration.

    The owner of this business currently oversees operations and is a reliable and very knowledgeable resource for employees. The owner manages the strong growth trajectory and supports positive client relationships.  To continue revenue growth, one could consider offering commissions to the sales team to boost external relationships networking and earning additional contracts.  

    Operations are managed from the 10,000 square foot headquarters located in the Greater Toronto Area. The company has over 15 years of experience serving Canada, and has expanded its business to Trinidad, Tobago, Turkey, China, and the United States.

    PRICE $8,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,420,321

  • Construction Management for Healthcare & Industrial Markets

    The owners of this Southeastern Pennsylvania Construction Management company will stay on board for 3-5 years! Well-established for over 40 years, they serve a diverse customer base covering an array of industries. Typically, they have healthcare projects running, with three individuals on staff who are certified healthcare constructors. They work within several general industrial markets, such as the food industry, with clients in snack food, dairy, and meat production, as well as industrial clients in various other production facilities. In addition to that core work, they serve general commercial business needs, including office and retail space.   They offer pre-construction services (site analysis/selection, project budget development, project planning & scheduling, land development coordination, etc.), along with complete construction management services, and post-occupancy follow-up and maintenance contracts, making sure each project is guided from beginning to end. Tracking approximately 400 projects per year, a large portion of their business is from repeat clients, generally over 60% annually, with some customers having 25-year tenure with the company.

     

    The company’s staff works out of a leased 26,000 sq. foot industrial building, which includes 18,500 sq. ft. of warehouse, storage, and woodshop area. Along with the 2 owners, who oversee daily operations, office management, and accounting, the team consists of 5 Project Managers and 17 full-time office staff, field employees, and carpenters. 18 trucks, 4 passenger vehicles, and a skid loader make up $760k in assets.

     

    Priced at $3,600,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Increasing advertising would capture more market share and would expand this company’s footprint far and wide. A 12.5% down payment of $450,000 returns $472,858 in the first year after debt payments – a 105% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,600,000 CASH FLOW $1,505,559

  • Wireless Tech Company with over $6M in Sales

    This business with over $6M in sales has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $7,930,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

  • Toronto Architecture Firm with Focus on Condos – 29% Profit Margin

    The owner of this architecture firm wants to stay on board as a partner and help grow the business! Selling at a low 2.95 multiple and with a 20% seller earnout, this is a tremendous acquisition opportunity for the right buyer. A solid team is already in place; the staff of 7 works out of a 2,500 square foot office and includes the owner/architect, 1 Senior Architect, 2 Mid-Level Architects, 2 Senior Technologists, and 1 Mid-Level Technologist. The team is highly educated and experienced at their craft, allowing for solid word-of-mouth referrals and a loyal, recurring client base of developers, engineers, and general contractors. This firm has been serving the Greater Toronto Area since 2000; their portfolio primarily consists of condominiums (80%), and includes commercial, industrial, institutional, and interiors. Their spectacular designs are well-known throughout the Toronto area.

     

    Priced at $960,000, a down payment of $144,000 returns $185,107 in the first year after debt payments – a 129% return on investment. 2021 is looking to be extremely profitable; several projects are already in different stages of development. This is an incredible opportunity for a new owner to step in and focus on recruiting and business development, while partnering with the current owner to expand the business. This partnership will result in more work being sought after and more projects brought into the fold, giving great potential for increased revenue and business expansion.

    PRICE $960,000 CASH FLOW $326,464

  • Hospitality Design Firm in Boston

    With an affluent worldwide client base, the owner of this interior design firm handles general oversight and is willing to provide a transition time of 2-4 years! Serving New England and overseas clients since 1989, this interior architecture firm has mostly commercial clients with a focus on condos and the hospitality industry and is credited for over 200 hotels in total. Project examples range from fitness centers, health clubs, country clubs, cafes, entertainment venues, aquariums, planetariums, penthouses, palaces and more. They are equipped to handle most design jobs from interior architecture all the way down to the smallest décor items. This firm has done work all over the world. Main areas of service include the New England area and the Middle East, but contracts frequently occur in the Caribbean, Chicago-metro and Texas. Some of their work is recognizable in Times Square. They have also reinvented a 1,500-family compound outside of Boston and brought its design up to modern day.

     

    The business is best known for their timeliness and their guarantee to always be on budget. This design firm is a very well known in the Boston area and most clients are acquired through word-of-mouth referrals from completed contracts. Along with a great reputation, they also have excellent personnel. Employees include 1 design director, 1 senior designer, 1 senior CAD designer, 1 designer, 1 purchasing agent, 1 junior designer, 1 renderer, and 1 bookkeeper. Creating additional marketing plans and increasing in-person sales are options to help continue to grow this business. The firm is currently under contract for a 10,000 square foot restaurant and six other restaurant venues.

     

    Priced at $845,000, this is a business opportunity with outstanding growth potential. The owner does not do any drawing or CAD work but oversees overall strategy and interfaces with key employees. The current plan is also to expand staff to include two more senior designers and an intern.  

    PRICE $845,000 CASH FLOW $304,548

  • HVAC, Electrical, Security & Traffic Signals – 80% Recurring Clients

    This multi-service business has an incredibly versatile team of employees in place – 90% of their work is self-performed!  With an 80% recurring client base, this company has an average WIP worth $2M. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. Less than 20% of business is new construction and they have 25+ recurring clients that span different industries. They have existing government contracts with the city and department of transportation.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services.

     

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. They are well-known all over the Carolinas. Work is typically steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office.

     

    Priced at $6,050,000, this is a business that is in a position to grow in the construction industry. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide.  

    PRICE $6,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Architecture Firm for Education, Senior Living, and Tech Facilities

    Priced at $475,000, this Los Angeles architecture firm is selling at a 1.3 multiple with a 433% return on investment! With a team of highly skilled designers and architects with years of experience, this firm has fostered many relationships by designing spaces for children and seniors alike, and have maintained lasting connections with customers, yielding long-term contracts.   They use top-notch software to create beautiful designs for educational institutions like colleges and K-12 schools, early childhood centers, senior living homes, and technical projects for communication or industrial companies.  Due to their focus on universal and sustainable designs, their plans take into consideration the environmental impact of the design.  The owners are dedicated to their work and both take on project management roles as well as business and financial management tasks. Due to one of the owners being ill, they will only be available to train for up to 6 months; however, the second owner can stay on for 2-3 years as negotiated.

     

    The 3,000 square feet of space is well-suited to this company’s team.  A welcoming reception area greets visitors while private offices, conference rooms, and large open drafting areas are tailored to the staff.  The team of technical staff (8-9) and architects (2 owners and 2 contracted associates) are supported by the Office Manager and a bookkeeper. 

     

    Growth in the Los Angeles area is great.  A focus on educational facilities alone could generate additional contracts for long-term development and modernization projects.  Working for entities with bonded projects is also an area for sustained work as these funds are less susceptible to economic fluctuations.

    PRICE $475,000 CASH FLOW $489,795

  • Environmental Services for Commercial Clientele

    Passive ownership with 37 skilled employees in Washington! Located in the Seattle, Washington area, these specialists in the environmental industry have earned a 25% profit margin in 2018 and continue to experience year-over-year growth.  Asbestos removal (40%), interior demolition (40%), as well as mold and lead remediation (20%) are the main services offered by this company.  Commercial clients account for 80% of annual contract revenues, with residential projects producing 20%.  Clients include The Federal Government, Washington State Universities and schools, local municipalities, and health care facilities.  Day-to-day operations are led by a tenured vice president with management oversight of two administrative assistants, three estimators with project management experience, three operations managers, seven supervisors and the workforce.  The owner currently leads in a consultant capacity mentoring and developing leadership staff while also ensuring bonding and insurance.

     

    With a total of 9,300 square feet of space, the headquarters has ample room to further expand operations.  The office is 2,800 square feet and features five private offices, a reception area, a large conference room used for meetings, training, and environmental records storage.   The warehouse and shop span 6,500 square feet of indoor space allowing for staging, tool and inventory storage, and warehouse management.  An expansive paved lot and gravel yard of two acres house all heavy equipment, vehicles, disposal containers, and trailers.  Assets comprise all equipment necessary for safe testing, handling, and removal of hazardous materials.

     

    Strong revenue generating initiatives could be achieved by increasing the workforce to take on contracts currently sacrificed, driving growth of the container rental business, and utilizing targeted advertising to generate new contacts.

    PRICE $5,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,112,023

  • Electric & Security Automation Subcontractors with over $10M in Sales

    This business one of the largest electric and security automation subcontractors in the region, boasting over $10M in sales and a diverse client base comprised of schools, airports, casinos, distribution centers, municipalities, manufacturers, and venues!  65% of their revenue is new installs in existing buildings – which turn into maintenance revenue, which accounts for 35% of sales. With over 50 current employees, the owner of this business is willing to remain part of the team for 1-2 years.

    These specialty contractors focus on specialized electrical and low voltage work including automation, security, infrastructure, and industrial projects. Seven of the over fifty employees focus on administrative tasks, while the rest are union employees who work on-site.  The well-rounded crews include project managers as well as supervising managers.  The owners currently focus on estimations, project management and business oversight and are not in the field.  Projects often include large-scale security system installation, industrial machine installation and maintenance, complete electrical installation, data center electrical work, and the installation of building automation with related controls.  They focus on data/security and automation. 

    The $753,000 in assets includes Shop tools, furniture, fixtures, electric benders, tugger, high voltage tester, 2014 John Deer tractor, off road ATV, conduit bender a track loader, 9 Ford trucks, 6 Chevy Trucks, 2 trailers, 1 load haul and 1 GMC truck.

    Priced at $6,315,000, the company has shown exceptional growth over the years and the transition to electrical focused services has benefited this company.  A continued dedication to automation, data centers, and security could generate future growth. Return on investment in the first year after debt payments is 108%.

    PRICE $6,315,000 CASH FLOW $1,697,195

  • Industrial Painting & Site Prep with 90+ Employees

    With over 90 employees and nearly $2.8M in assets, this business has an 80% recurring client base!  Located in Ohio and New York, this company specializes in painting large infrastructure projects as well as any site preparation associated with a job.  Assets include $2.1M worth of painting supplies, safety equipment, rigging, and tools, and $680k in trucks and trailers; all equipment is in place for continued success.  The team of union foremen and painters work primarily for general contractors and maximize their awarded contracts through competitive bidding and strong professional relationships. 

     

    Service area is 90% in the state of New York and 10% in Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Ohio. Operations are managed from the Ohio office and supplies are stored in a New York area warehouse.  There are additional field offices for each large project where location-based staff report daily. 

     

    Clients are 80% recurring and consist of general contractors working on infrastructure & municipal projects. They have a highly skilled team of 92 people: 6 administrative staff, 3 project managers, 8 foremen, and 75 painters. Providing industrial painting and site preparation for bridges, tunnels, and transit stations, this company also does lead abatement and shield installation in the winter months when painting is not an option. The team completes approximately 40 projects per year – average projects run in the $500k-$1M range.

     

    Increasing capital to increase bonding capacity would certainly lead to growth in revenue, as well as expanding services to include outdoor painting of private buildings.

     

    Both owners currently work within the business.  The majority owner focuses on financial oversight and business management and is willing to remain on staff through transition and beyond. The other owner is the lead estimator and oversees field operations, and he is willing to stay on with the company for several years after closing, as desired.

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $4,437,549

Manufacturing/Fabrication (10)

  • Contract Manufacturer of Corporate & Collegiate Headwear, Bags, & Apparel

    With nearly $60M in sales in 2020, this contract manufacturing company has a full management staff already in place! Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production/manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already established, they have been able to solidify themselves in the market, acting as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors.

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days.

    Priced at $15,900,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $15,900,000 CASH FLOW $4,161,997

  • Commercial Glazing Contractor in OKC

    With nearly $6M in sales in 2020 and $7.5M already in their backlog, this commercial glazing contractor has been established in Oklahoma City for over 70 years! Services include design, fabrication, manufacturing, and installation of aluminum curtainwall, storefront, heavy glass doors, glass handrails, and swinging & sliding aluminum doors. Working out of a 35,000 sq. ft. factory, the team has top-notch CNC capabilities that are unmatched in the area. There are 45 full-time employees, including the owner, who handles general oversight, 3 Project Managers, 2 Estimators, 1 CAD Drafter, 1 Superintendent, 5 Foremen, 2 in Accounting, 10 in the factory, and a highly skilled team in the field handling installations. Their main focus is on mid to high-rise towers; sale size ranges from $250k-$3M, with $500k-$700k billed out each month. Most work (90%) is bid by invitation from the GC, with work secured 6-12 months into future. Along with $7.5M worth of signed contracts, the company has $3.5M in their pipeline.

     

    Because it is such a specialized industry, the company uses the Union from time to time out of Texas and New Mexico. Their participation agreement with the union allows them to remain independent and hire from the union when needed for large projects. The company’s bonding capacity of $12M, along with their exceptional factory, equipment, and manpower, allows them to bid on monumental projects in the area.

     

    Priced at $2,000,000, growth potential is tremendous for a new owner. Expanding the service area into surrounding states and pursuing more high-rise projects would lead to a huge revenue boost. The factory, equipment, client relationships, industry reputation, and highly experienced team is already in place. A new owner could step in and take this company to the next level. A 12.5% down payment of $250,000 returns $283,695 in the first year after debt payments – a 113% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,000,000 CASH FLOW $539,461

  • Hot Runner System Design, Engineering, and Manufacturing – over $1.5M in Sales

    With 25 patented products and a nationwide client base, this Chicago area business had over $1.5M in sales and a 39% profit margin in 2020! The company specializes in the design, engineering, and manufacturing of hot runner systems and components for mold making and thermoplastic processing plants. After designing and engineering the custom hot runner system to fit their customers’ plastic injection molding system, they manufacture the system on-site, assuring quality control and reduced cost to their clients. They also have the capability to retrofit existing molds; they can repair or re-configure a system, replace heaters, nozzles, and other components, and they can troubleshoot leaks, heating issues, and flow problems. All of these services contribute to their long-standing client relationships and solid reputation in the market for over 35 years. Their diverse client base consists of mold makers and processing plants for consumer goods in categories such as medical, automotive, cosmetics, caps & closures, consumer electronics, and pet products. Their customers design the product, manufacture it through 3D printing, and gives them the specs; this team then designs the custom hot runner system needed to fit their needs and requirements.

     

    The highly skilled and experienced team includes the Owner (President/Treasurer), as well as a Design Engineer/Project Manager, 3 Machine Operators, 1 in Assembly, 1 Office Manager, and 1 Financial Officer. The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and team as well as some of the engineering; the Design Engineer/Project Manager handles all design engineering for the hot runner systems and manages each project from beginning to end.

     

    Priced at $2,350,000, this company certainly has the potential to go global!  An existing hot runner system company could take this business to the next level by using the 25 patented products, the team’s experience, and the customers already in place and expanding. A mold maker could also expand their business by purchasing this company, which would complement their services and products.

    PRICE $2,350,000 CASH FLOW $606,398

  • Millwork Manufacturing for Churches & Schools with $6.4M in Backlog

    With 30 signed contracts worth $6.4M on the books for 2021, this year is looking to be the most profitable year on record for this custom millwork manufacturing company!  Being considered an essential business, they have not been impacted by COVID. Based in a 10,000 sq. ft. facility with 900k+ in equipment and assets, this custom millwork business is affiliated with all major contractors in Utah. Established for 25 years and licensed in Utah, California, Idaho, New Mexico, and Hawaii, their clients include schools, churches, hospitals, corporate offices, universities, and government buildings, along with some residential work in apartment complexes, homes, and condos. Assets include CNC routers, a horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, state-of-the art bander, table saw, chop saws, timesaver sander, a state-of-the-art spray booth for finish work, plus all of the basic equipment & tools needed for each job. The highly skilled team is comprised of the owner, who handles general oversight, 1 Shop Forman, 2 Project Managers, 1 Estimator, 1 Production Manager, 1 Office Manager, 4 Installers, 10-15 Fabricators, and subcontracted installers as needed.

     

    The business is licensed in Hawaii, which is a major advantage, as there is very little competition; the company has completed $4M worth of work there.  Their reputation has earned them several contracts with top-name businesses, religious affiliations, and area universities.

     

    Priced at $2,900,000, this company is in a prime position for growth!  At max capacity in their current facility, expanding their labor force and facility would lead to incredible revenue growth. There is also strong potential to take over the market share in the region, as many smaller businesses will not survive the pandemic. A 12.5% down payment of $362,500 will return $382,999 in the first year after debt payments – a 106% return on investment.

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $753,860

  • Custom Trailer Manufacturing & Fabrication with 24% Profit Margin

    The average sale size for this custom trailer manufacturing business is $52,500 per trailer! Boasting a 24% profit margin in 2020, this custom trailer fabrication company serves a wide variety of clients, including rural municipalities, farming communities, road-pavers, and gravel haulers. Operating out of an 18k sq. ft. facility in Southern Saskatchewan, the highly skilled team does custom trailer engineering and fabrication,  along with trailer maintenance, refurbishing, and supplying fabricated replacement parts. Trailers include gravel, belly dump, clam shell, flat decks, and more, each with a variety of dimensions that can be customized. Refurbishing work consists of sandblasting, painting, and general welding repairs, and the company also supplies fabricated replacement parts such as stoppers, fifth wheel replacements, air cylinders, and tarps. Included in purchase price is over $313,354 worth of assets, including equipment such as band saws, jigs, a forklift, hoists, a payloader, welders, a shearer, an iron worker, a hydraulic press, trailer rotisserie stands, bench grinders, a paint system, and a Caterpillar 950 Payloader.

     

    Sales are conducted by two dealers in Canada and the owner, with most sales being done over the phone and no travel. Personnel includes four experienced employees: 1 owner, 2 full-time welders/fabricators, and 1 full-time office/shop assistant. The current owner oversees operations, conducts some sales, and assists in the shop when needed.

     

    The ability to customize dimensions for various trailer styles sets this business apart from competitors. Opportunities for growth include expanding the current website and social media presence to attract a wider range of customers. There is also an opportunity to take advantage of a more streamlined process through the Alberta government; instead of doing a bid system, the business could get on a short list to be approved to provide services/products on request. Priced at $420,000 and nearly 75% collateralized, a buyer can expect a 113% return on investment in the first year after debt payments.

    PRICE $420,000 CASH FLOW $124,517

  • HVAC, Sheet Metal Fabrication & Plumbing – Commercial Only

     

    60% collateralized and favorable financing terms! This HVAC and Plumbing company has been serving the Markham, Ontario area for over 15 years! They offer HVAC (50%), plumbing (45%), and refrigeration (5%) services to commercial and industrial customers within a 100-km radius of Markham. Their highly experienced hands-on team is comprised of 6 sheet metal fabricators, 4 plumbers, 5 on the refrigeration/gas crew, 1 administrative assistant, and 1 subcontracted PT bookkeeper.  Assets include 9 vehicles, each equipped with various tools and equipment for the task at hand, and the business has a substantial supply of machinery and equipment, including 7 vacuum pumps, 2 coring machines, 8 torches, various drills & die heads, 3 chop saws, 3 air compressors, a generator, and a backflow prevention kit.

     

    With this business having a services and construction side, they offer an extensive variety of services and projects! This business prides itself on being knowledgeable and well-trained to provide the highest level of technical service on systems such as air conditioning, refrigeration systems, process heating, ventilation systems, water chillers, boilers, and indoor air quality monitoring.

     

    With a solid reputation in place, this business gains clients through an ample number of word-of-mouth referrals. Increasing advertising efforts and creating a social media presence would lead to revenue growth. Hiring staff for management positions (Operations Manager, Service Manager, Chief Estimator, Project Manager) would undoubtedly take the company to the next level.

    PRICE $2,600,000 CASH FLOW $701,779

  • Wireless Tech Company with over $6M in Sales

    This business with over $6M in sales has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $7,930,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • HVAC & Plumbing in Northern California with 70 Employees

    This HVAC and plumbing company in Northern California has seen year-over-year sales growth since 2017 with nearly $13M in sales in 2020!  Serving the Sacramento area since 2003, they complete HVAC (70%) and plumbing services (30%). With an on-site fully automated sheet metal fabrication shop, the company is capable of manufacturing ductwork up to 14 gauge, plumbing and piping, as well as architectural sheet metal and flashings. There are 70 employees on staff, including controllers, foremen, project managers, assistants, and a field/shop work force.  The owner has built a solid customer base with a focus on serving schools, government institutions, and commercial office buildings, and many customers have been with this company for over fifteen years.  The owner currently focuses on lead generation, some estimations, bonding, and general oversight of the business.

     

    Operations are managed from a large 14,000 square foot location in the Sacramento Valley area.  The office has 2,000 square feet of space with a reception area, private offices, and staff spaces.  The remaining 12,000 square feet is dedicated to warehouse, storage, and the fabrication shop. 

     

    Priced at $6,900,000, there is huge potential for continued growth and success. The industry in Northern California always has room for expansion and the company could take on additional available work in the region.  Another area for development could be found in adding a service department and considering the implementation of maintenance and inspection contracts.

    PRICE $6,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,915,783

  • Manufacturing & Installation of Custom-Fitted Furniture

    Priced at $710,000, a down payment of $71,000 returns $114,565 in the first year after debt payments – a 161% return on investment! With an extremely diverse client base consisting of both residential and commercial customers, this company specializes in custom fitted furniture for schools, healthcare facilities, churches, and corporate offices, as well as residents in the Twin Cities region. There is a well-trained team of 10 already in place that includes designers, sales representatives, and accounting staff, as well as employees who focus on production, assembly, delivery, and installation.  Their mission is to provide the client with individually designed, high quality furniture solutions at a fraction of the cost of custom-made furniture. This dynamic company utilizes in-house engineering and manufacturing as well as outside resources to create beautiful solutions that fit any space perfectly, maximizing storage and functionality. The team successfully altered their process 2020 to include virtual design consultations and they are following all necessary protocols for in-home meetings, deliveries, and installations.

     

    The modular furniture system includes components for offices, storage spaces, bedrooms, home entertainment areas, wall beds, closets, and garages.  The owners focus on managing the daily operations including design, sales, ordering, production, marketing, and financial oversight.

     

    Operations are managed from their conveniently located headquarters with ample space for the showroom, offices, and work area for manufacturing and assembly.  Continued growth can be found through increased marketing and networking to residential clients who are working from home. With work already in the pipeline and a flexible transition period, this business is ready for the next owner to step in for continued growth and success.    

    PRICE $710,000 CASH FLOW $206,120

Contracting/Building/Improvements (18)

  • HVAC, Electrical, Security & Traffic Signals – 80% Recurring Clients

    This multi-service business has an incredibly versatile team of employees in place – 90% of their work is self-performed!  With an 80% recurring client base, this company has an average WIP worth $2M. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. Less than 20% of business is new construction and they have 25+ recurring clients that span different industries. They have existing government contracts with the city and department of transportation.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services.

     

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. They are well-known all over the Carolinas. Work is typically steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office.

     

    Priced at $6,050,000, this is a business that is in a position to grow in the construction industry. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide.  

    PRICE $6,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Construction Management for Healthcare & Industrial Markets

    The owners of this Southeastern Pennsylvania Construction Management company will stay on board for 3-5 years! Well-established for over 40 years, they serve a diverse customer base covering an array of industries. Typically, they have healthcare projects running, with three individuals on staff who are certified healthcare constructors. They work within several general industrial markets, such as the food industry, with clients in snack food, dairy, and meat production, as well as industrial clients in various other production facilities. In addition to that core work, they serve general commercial business needs, including office and retail space.   They offer pre-construction services (site analysis/selection, project budget development, project planning & scheduling, land development coordination, etc.), along with complete construction management services, and post-occupancy follow-up and maintenance contracts, making sure each project is guided from beginning to end. Tracking approximately 400 projects per year, a large portion of their business is from repeat clients, generally over 60% annually, with some customers having 25-year tenure with the company.

     

    The company’s staff works out of a leased 26,000 sq. foot industrial building, which includes 18,500 sq. ft. of warehouse, storage, and woodshop area. Along with the 2 owners, who oversee daily operations, office management, and accounting, the team consists of 5 Project Managers and 17 full-time office staff, field employees, and carpenters. 18 trucks, 4 passenger vehicles, and a skid loader make up $760k in assets.

     

    Priced at $3,600,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Increasing advertising would capture more market share and would expand this company’s footprint far and wide. A 12.5% down payment of $450,000 returns $472,858 in the first year after debt payments – a 105% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,600,000 CASH FLOW $1,505,559

  • Commercial Roofing Services – over $13.5M in Sales

    With over $13.5M in sales in 2020, this roofing & sheet metal company has over 70 employees in place! Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. With expertise in membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work, this business has considerable repeat business with general contractors, construction managers, and owners in the area. Their diversified client base includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,525,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,525,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Large Electrical Contractor in SW States with Immensely Growing Populations

    Boasting nearly $41.5M in sales in 2020 this electrical contracting company has over 400 full-time W2 employees with five offices throughout the American Southwest! Headquartered in Phoenix in an office/warehouse that holds $1M worth of inventory, the company also has offices in Tucson, Prescott, El Paso, and  Albuquerque. As the populations in those areas are booming, the demand for this company’s services is through the roof, with no end in sight. They currently wire around 200 homes per week, which comes out to about 10k wiring jobs per year. Their client base primarily consists of big builders in Arizona and smaller builders in New Mexico and Texas, with 10 of the big builders accounting for 80% of revenue. Work is secured years into the future, as builders may purchase land and develop it for 500-1,000 homes; those homes may take 7-10 years to be completed.

     

    In addition to a large variety of electrical services, the company also provides backhoe services for trenching used for direct-burial cables. Assets include 5 backhoes, around 350 trucks, and 2 long-haul tractor-trailers. Their inventory is concentrated in the Phoenix warehouse. As jobs are given the go-ahead, the necessary components are packed up and transported to the correct city office, where they are picked up by a field employee and taken to the job site.

     

    Priced at $23,550,000 growth potential is tremendous for a new owner. Builders are frequently requesting this company to work in other cities and states due to a massive influx of new residents (Texas and Arizona combined gained 800,000 residents in 2018-19 while Colorado and Oklahoma gained 350,000).* Expanding into these areas undergoing significant population growth would certainly increase revenue for years to come. The solid reputation and strong team are already in place – a new owner could take this company to the next level.

     

    *Data taken from US Census Bureau—State-to-State Migration Flows: 2019

    PRICE $23,550,000 CASH FLOW $4,120,948

  • Non-Commercial Aircraft Inspections & Maintenance w/ 25+ Recurring Clients

    This corporate aircraft maintenance & inspection business has $1.2M in projected revenue for 2021! With 25+ recurring clients, their primary customer base consists of aircraft managers and brokers.  Aircraft maintenance accounts include routine maintenance, inspections, and annual inspections required by the FAA. Two FAA certified mechanics lead the team – one IA Certified and one AP certified. Multi-engine planes require inspections after a certain number of hours flown. Current customers allow access to a maintenance portal that shows hours logged per aircraft, giving them the capability of knowing the work that needs done in the near future and securing the work with the aircraft managers. The FAA requires a logbook entry for each inspection; this team requires payment from their customer prior to logging the inspection, ensuring full and on-time payments each time. Sale sizes range from $2k (for small maintenance jobs) to $22k for an average inspection, all the way up to $50-$60k for the larger maintenance projects.

     

    In June of 2020, the business expanded into three hangers, each approximately 3,600 sq. ft. Currently, one hanger is being rented by an outside party ($2,000/month), and one hanger is a double without an inner wall. The rented hanger was built to allow the business to pursue military contracts, as those planes require a separate facility from commercial/general aviation.

     

    Priced at $649,000, a buyer would see a 141% return on investment in the first year after debt payments. With ample room for growth, this business has tremendous potential!  Pursuing military contracts would boost revenue, as well as taking on ex-military aircraft mechanics in apprentice roles for 3 months and setting up satellite offices at other airports that can’t justify a full-time maintenance facility.

    PRICE $649,000 CASH FLOW $174,945

  • Commercial Tile Contractor with 30% Profit Margin

    All labor is outsourced for this commercial tile installation company, keeping fixed cost on labor and overhead incredibly low! Clients include General Contractors and Construction Managers, and currently the work is primarily for service stations throughout Texas. There is one part-time W2 employee (the owner’s spouse), who works approximately 10 hours/week from a home office doing estimates, purchasing, coordinating deliveries, scheduling installations with the labor force, and bookkeeping; all labor is subcontracted out. Sales could easily climb into the $2M-$3M range by actively submitting more bids, expanding the product line to include other types of flooring, pursuing work in schools, grocery stores, retail stores, and entertainment/restaurants, and by tapping into the residential market. Service station tile contracts generally run anywhere from $20k-$120k. The company currently has 10 projects on the books worth approximately $238k; the average project takes 7 days to complete.

     

    This business is not consumer-based, so there was no COVID impact on sales – clients did not put a moratorium on construction projects. The company does advertise in the Blue Book, which gives them requests for bids via email – they currently have nearly 20 open bids, along with the 8 projects in progress.

     

    Priced at $720,000, a 10% down payment of $72,000 returns $120,857 in the first year after debt payments – a 168% return on investment! With long-standing relationships already in place with General Contractors in the area, a new owner could take this business to the next level.  The current owner bought the business in 2015, when sales were $250k and grew revenue to $3.5M by 2018, with at least 5 bids per day and a much larger client base, proving that this business is capable of tremendous growth. They intentionally downsized the business in early 2019 (semi-retirement) and chose to keep sales in the $600k-$700k range. The company has seen sales in $3M range in the past and could easily reach those heights again under new ownership.

    PRICE $720,000 CASH FLOW $213,702

  • Concrete Landscape Edging in KC – 53% Profit Margin

    With nearly 100% of their work coming from referrals and word of mouth, this decorative concrete installer and specialty garden retailer has seen continued growth since 2016!  With a 53% profit margin in 2020 and a 45% profit margin in 2019, this company designs, installs, and maintains a niche, in demand, and high utility concrete product while also selling and installing specialty garden products related to their other work. 55% of revenues coming from concrete installation, 39% from retail, and the other 6% from subcontracting add-on services that utilize local landscapers and contractors, they have a well-established product line to supply the growing, and legal medical cannabis industry that has a huge potential for growth. Already in March of 2021, YTD retail sales revenue is up 180% and net income is up over $39,000. A very small team of employees has maintained these high margins with a low labor cost. This company has over 2,000 residential concrete clients and thousands of retail store clients, including high repeat clientele. This company closes more than 95% of estimates they perform. This company has strong cash flow and does not have any issues collecting payment, resulting in zero A/R.

     

    The company has many years of experience in a niche specialty growing supplies industry  and has relationships with major vendors and distributors. They are well known for their expertise in this growing specialty industry. This retail category has a huge untapped potential as medical marijuana has just become legal in Missouri. This portion of the business has   exponential growth potential and could possibly be spun off into its own entity with multiple locations as the industry evolves. Also, by adding equipment, personnel and advertising , the concrete side of the business could easily be doubled or tripled with the leadership of a motivated buyer.

     

    At the purchase price of $1,605,000, a 12.5% down payment of $200,625  returns $244,222, which is a 122% return on investment in the first year!

    PRICE $1,605,000 CASH FLOW $449,474

  • Structural & Offsite Civil Engineering with 70+ Recurring Clients

    With a 4-year average profit margin of 63%, this structural & offsite civil engineering firm has $1.1M in sales in the first 5 months of 2021! The sellers of this well-established firm will roll 20% equity and stay on board for up to 5 years. The majority of their 70+ recurring clients have been with them for a minimum of 8 years. Their client base is comprised of contractors, developers, architects, engineers, and owner-builders, Established since 2006, approximate sale size ranges from $20k-$60k for residential projects and $2k-$3k for the offsite civil structures. The hot residential market in Las Vegas has propelled this firm’s business to focus and specialize in custom, tract, and multifamily homes, as well as offsite civil structures. The team includes the 3 owners, who are licensed professional engineers (CE), 1 Senior Project Manager, 1 Drafter, and 2 regular professionals subcontracted as needed. The new owner would not need to be a licensed engineer; there would just need to be one on staff to stamp the drawings, designs, plans, etc.  

     

    The firm works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. building with 7 offices, a conference room, meeting room, IT room, and a bullpen with 6-cubicle workstations and a production area. The owners of the business also own the building (through a separate entity) and lease it to themselves for $7,000/month. (A fair market rate for rent would be in the $4,000/month range.)

     

    Priced at $6,350,000, the growth potential for this firm is substantial. With the constant influx of population, the Las Vegas construction market is booming with design demand in every sector. This demand yields several untapped markets in the region that this firm simply does not currently have the manpower to explore. A larger firm looking to expand into this hot market, or an existing firm that offers different services, could seamlessly merge with this versatile and well-recognized company to increase market share, and exponentially boost revenue. Having established a great reputation, this firm’s current marketing practice consists entirely of word-of-mouth advertising. So, updating their website, creating a social media presence, and implementing a marketing strategy could also lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $6,350,000 CASH FLOW $2,005,536

  • Scaffolding Equipment Rental Company – over $13M in Assets

    With a three-year average cash flow of $5,457,808, this company offers top-of-the-line scaffolding equipment to a diverse customer base of 500 customers in the Twin Cities metro area! They currently have 15 recurring clients that include general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair and installation contractors. They install, dismantle, rent, and sell frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms with 59% of their revenue coming from rentals. With only $1M in capex, this business has over $13M in assets and over $3.5M in work-in-progress and backlog. They are on average 70% utilized with about $9.9M in inventory out for rentals on a monthly basis. With $3.9M in hydro mobile inventory (70 – 75 units) they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 1-3 units of a competing brand. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market.

     

    This company does little to no marketing or advertising because they have recurring clients due to their top-notch customer service, delivery options and the quality of indoor and outdoor scaffolding. This business has a sister company (23% of revenue) that is Union based. Their current building space is 50,000 square feet with 3,000 square feet being the office building and 47,000 square feet of warehouse. There is also 1.2 acres yard for outside storage. 

     

    In any given month, they have around 150 work orders and their large projects that go for longer than on year are greater than $1M in value. Assets include almost $11M in scaffolding inventory and $1.6M in vehicles like trucks (5), 27-foot straight trucks, one-ton truck (1), pickups (20). Their current backlog of projects is about $3.5M and they are over $13M sales for 2020. At any given time, they have anywhere from 45 – 60 employees with 21 of them being office workers like sales representatives, office managers and the rest being laborers and contractors.

     

    Two of the owners focus primarily on sales and the third owner manages day to day business but they are currently transitioning responsibilities to other employees. Priced at $22,950,000, this is a business that is positioned to grow in the scaffolding space through acquisition of more inventory and expansion into different cities.

    PRICE $22,950,000 CASH FLOW $5,457,808

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • Stone & Tile Cleaning, Sealing, and Polishing Services in Phoenix

    This business has over 1,600 active clients in the Phoenix Metro and low overhead costs! Established in 2013, this full-service stone cleaning, honing, polishing, and repair company has $115K in assets including 2 vans equipped with truck mounted hot water extraction equipment, high-speed weighted buffers, tools, and supplies. Two efficient technicians manage the entire on-site workload which involves cleaning, sealing, polishing, honing, stripping, repair, and treatment for all-natural stones as well as tile and carpet cleaning. The staff also includes a manager, an administrator/salesperson, and an overseer of the financials. All work is done for high-end homeowners, commercial businesses, hotels, banks, condominiums, or anyone with natural stone surfaces within the Phoenix Metro area. 

     

    The business operates from one warehouse that is not open to the public. They do utilize a virtual office when it is needed, but operations can be run remotely with ease. The team may be lean but is incredibly effective in running the business day-to-day. The owner currently handles scheduling and operations.

     

    This business has superior social media reviews, an excellent reputation, high quality services, and a well-trained team in place. Revenue growth would certainly be obtained by advertising, infusing capital into an additional van to increase capacity, or maximizing current assets with extended hours to generate additional income. Priced at $615,000, a 10% down payment of $61,500 returns $107,139 in the first year after debt payments – a 174% return on investment!

    PRICE $615,000 CASH FLOW $214,197

  • Home Remodels & Additions with over $1.1M in Sales in 2020

    This home remodeling company in Lincoln has had year-over-year sales growth since 2017 and a 23% profit margin in 2020!   This well-established business specializes in kitchen and bath remodels, additions, finish carpentry, and custom cabinetry design and installation. Serving Lincoln and surrounding communities for nearly 30 years, this highly skilled design staff offers an unmatched experience from beginning to end. Clients include remodeling homeowners looking for a tune-up or additions, and residential/commercial contractors looking for interior finishes in a newly built home. A solid team is already in place; an office manager handles all incoming phone calls and e-mails from new and existing clients, as well as quoting, invoicing, scheduling, and ordering. A project manager runs the jobs on site, and 6 experienced laborers make sure the work is top notch from start to finish.

     

    Home remodeling and additions account for 50% of their revenue, 40% is finish carpentry, and 10% custom cabinetry. Assets include $78,000 worth of portable equipment, shop equipment, and hand tools used by three crews of laborers.

     

    Growth opportunities are endless. Adding another project manager would allow the company to take on more jobs. The demand for home remodeling and additions has increased in recent months due to lower interest rates on home loans and construction loans. Priced at $640,000, a 10% down payment of $64,000 returns $182,355 in the first year after debt payments – a 285% return on investment.

    PRICE $640,000 CASH FLOW $264,884

  • HVAC & Plumbing in Northern California with 70 Employees

    This HVAC and plumbing company in Northern California has seen year-over-year sales growth since 2017 with nearly $13M in sales in 2020!  Serving the Sacramento area since 2003, they complete HVAC (70%) and plumbing services (30%). With an on-site fully automated sheet metal fabrication shop, the company is capable of manufacturing ductwork up to 14 gauge, plumbing and piping, as well as architectural sheet metal and flashings. There are 70 employees on staff, including controllers, foremen, project managers, assistants, and a field/shop work force.  The owner has built a solid customer base with a focus on serving schools, government institutions, and commercial office buildings, and many customers have been with this company for over fifteen years.  The owner currently focuses on lead generation, some estimations, bonding, and general oversight of the business.

     

    Operations are managed from a large 14,000 square foot location in the Sacramento Valley area.  The office has 2,000 square feet of space with a reception area, private offices, and staff spaces.  The remaining 12,000 square feet is dedicated to warehouse, storage, and the fabrication shop. 

     

    Priced at $6,900,000, there is huge potential for continued growth and success. The industry in Northern California always has room for expansion and the company could take on additional available work in the region.  Another area for development could be found in adding a service department and considering the implementation of maintenance and inspection contracts.

    PRICE $6,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,915,783

  • Manufacturing & Installation of Custom-Fitted Furniture

    Priced at $710,000, a down payment of $71,000 returns $114,565 in the first year after debt payments – a 161% return on investment! With an extremely diverse client base consisting of both residential and commercial customers, this company specializes in custom fitted furniture for schools, healthcare facilities, churches, and corporate offices, as well as residents in the Twin Cities region. There is a well-trained team of 10 already in place that includes designers, sales representatives, and accounting staff, as well as employees who focus on production, assembly, delivery, and installation.  Their mission is to provide the client with individually designed, high quality furniture solutions at a fraction of the cost of custom-made furniture. This dynamic company utilizes in-house engineering and manufacturing as well as outside resources to create beautiful solutions that fit any space perfectly, maximizing storage and functionality. The team successfully altered their process 2020 to include virtual design consultations and they are following all necessary protocols for in-home meetings, deliveries, and installations.

     

    The modular furniture system includes components for offices, storage spaces, bedrooms, home entertainment areas, wall beds, closets, and garages.  The owners focus on managing the daily operations including design, sales, ordering, production, marketing, and financial oversight.

     

    Operations are managed from their conveniently located headquarters with ample space for the showroom, offices, and work area for manufacturing and assembly.  Continued growth can be found through increased marketing and networking to residential clients who are working from home. With work already in the pipeline and a flexible transition period, this business is ready for the next owner to step in for continued growth and success.    

    PRICE $710,000 CASH FLOW $206,120

  • Electric & Security Automation Subcontractors with over $10M in Sales

    This business one of the largest electric and security automation subcontractors in the region, boasting over $10M in sales and a diverse client base comprised of schools, airports, casinos, distribution centers, municipalities, manufacturers, and venues!  65% of their revenue is new installs in existing buildings – which turn into maintenance revenue, which accounts for 35% of sales. With over 50 current employees, the owner of this business is willing to remain part of the team for 1-2 years.

    These specialty contractors focus on specialized electrical and low voltage work including automation, security, infrastructure, and industrial projects. Seven of the over fifty employees focus on administrative tasks, while the rest are union employees who work on-site.  The well-rounded crews include project managers as well as supervising managers.  The owners currently focus on estimations, project management and business oversight and are not in the field.  Projects often include large-scale security system installation, industrial machine installation and maintenance, complete electrical installation, data center electrical work, and the installation of building automation with related controls.  They focus on data/security and automation. 

    The $753,000 in assets includes Shop tools, furniture, fixtures, electric benders, tugger, high voltage tester, 2014 John Deer tractor, off road ATV, conduit bender a track loader, 9 Ford trucks, 6 Chevy Trucks, 2 trailers, 1 load haul and 1 GMC truck.

    Priced at $6,315,000, the company has shown exceptional growth over the years and the transition to electrical focused services has benefited this company.  A continued dedication to automation, data centers, and security could generate future growth. Return on investment in the first year after debt payments is 108%.

    PRICE $6,315,000 CASH FLOW $1,697,195

  • Industrial Painting & Site Prep with 90+ Employees

    With over 90 employees and nearly $2.8M in assets, this business has an 80% recurring client base!  Located in Ohio and New York, this company specializes in painting large infrastructure projects as well as any site preparation associated with a job.  Assets include $2.1M worth of painting supplies, safety equipment, rigging, and tools, and $680k in trucks and trailers; all equipment is in place for continued success.  The team of union foremen and painters work primarily for general contractors and maximize their awarded contracts through competitive bidding and strong professional relationships. 

     

    Service area is 90% in the state of New York and 10% in Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Ohio. Operations are managed from the Ohio office and supplies are stored in a New York area warehouse.  There are additional field offices for each large project where location-based staff report daily. 

     

    Clients are 80% recurring and consist of general contractors working on infrastructure & municipal projects. They have a highly skilled team of 92 people: 6 administrative staff, 3 project managers, 8 foremen, and 75 painters. Providing industrial painting and site preparation for bridges, tunnels, and transit stations, this company also does lead abatement and shield installation in the winter months when painting is not an option. The team completes approximately 40 projects per year – average projects run in the $500k-$1M range.

     

    Increasing capital to increase bonding capacity would certainly lead to growth in revenue, as well as expanding services to include outdoor painting of private buildings.

     

    Both owners currently work within the business.  The majority owner focuses on financial oversight and business management and is willing to remain on staff through transition and beyond. The other owner is the lead estimator and oversees field operations, and he is willing to stay on with the company for several years after closing, as desired.

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $4,437,549

  • Home Remodels, Additions & Interior Design for Houston Real Estate Investors

    The owner of this company works part-time and does no field work!  With an infrastructure set up to support larger clients and maintain relationships, a highly skilled staff of 12 is already in place and continues to build solid client relationships. Employees include 1 PT Admin Assistant, 1 PT Office Manager, 1 PT Network IT, an Operations Manager, 1 Residential Estimator, 2 Superintendents, 1 Commercial Specialist, 2 Client Support staff, 1 Document Control staff, 1 Inside Salesperson and 6-12 field crew employees. Clients include corporate real estate investors, private entities, and some residential work, along with commercial and military when needed.  The team works all over Texas, with 70% of their work being done in Houston, 20% in San Antonio, and 10% in Dallas. Services vary from complete home remodels and home additions, to maintenance, repair, and interior design. The owner’s position has been designed to be strictly part-time operations and financial work. 

     

    Assets include $261k worth of equipment, $124k in vehicles, $180k in A/R, and $210k in work-in-progress.  The 4,200 sq. ft. warehouse, ½ acre equipment yard, and 2,500 sq. ft. office building currently used is available for sale or lease, separate from the sale of the business. 

     

    Priced at $990,000, a down payment of $123,750 returns $214,318 in the first year after debt payments – a 173% return on investment! The current owner is willing to stay on for 6 months to 1 year, if desired. Growth opportunities include expanding into business to consumer residential projects as well as taking on more governmental commercial contracts.

    PRICE $990,000 CASH FLOW $340,922

  • Concrete Pumping & Maintenance with 90% Recurring Client Base

    With a 90% recurring client base, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, over $10M in hard assets, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    PRICE $17,500,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

Tech: IT/Software/ECommerce (11)

  • Online Medical Equipment: 100% Dropship

    This completely remote internet-enabled, multi-channel distributor of medical, surgical and therapy supplies and equipment provides over 40,000 discounted medical supplies and was established in 1989. As a pioneer in online medical supplies, this 100% drop shipper runs on thin margins to provide services to all, with 80% of the business serving consumers (e-commerce) and the other 20% serving businesses. By ordering medical supplies in advance, users and organizations, including nursing homes and assisted living facilities, can bring in cost efficiencies. As a BBB accredited business with A+ rating, they are able to keep their prices low by being an online company and not having the added expense of a retail store.

    This company never sees the product but is simply the middleman between manufacturers/suppliers and the consumer. Therefore, no lease is needed, and the owner can run the company from any location. The current owner is thinking about retirement but is wanting to stay with the company for as long as needed to continue to work and aid in the transition.

    COVID-19 has brought in new opportunities such as wholesale and brokering. These areas can continue to be expanded on to further increase sales and profit margins. Their current relationship with manufacturers and suppliers as well as their reputation in customer service has allowed the company to continue in their success and provide low-cost new quality products.

    At the purchase price of $1,075,000, a 10% down payment of $102,800 returns $179,811 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 167% return on investment.

    PRICE $1,075,000 CASH FLOW $318,434

  • E-Commerce Sales of Work at Height & Fall Arrest Gear

    With 80% of sales through Amazon, this e-commerce business has customers spanning the country and is currently managed by the owner from a home office. With over 12,000 customers nationwide, the company offers a variety of work at height and fall arrest gear for customers in various fields of work, including fire departments, military, FBI, industrial, and the movie/music industry. Examples of customers in need of these products: wind turbine technicians, cell tower climbers, stadium/arena rigging technicians, mid-to-high rise window cleaners, scaffolders, roofers, construction workers, firefighters, lighting technicians, steelworkers, and glaziers. The owner manages all sales & order processing full-time, while one part-time employee spends 2 hours/day packing orders into boxes. A unique software system is in place that integrates orders from various locations automatically. Although the company represents $15M worth of 3,000+ products on their website, it only carries $65k-$85k of inventory at any one time, with inventory moving & changing on a daily basis. With this highly automated system, the business can process 50 orders in under an hour.

     

    Using 5 primary vendors, the owner orders inventory on a daily basis, with up to 15 purchase orders per day. It can take 2-4 days to get that inventory, and it moves quickly once received. After processing a customer’s order, the system generates the invoice & label, the item is boxed, and all orders are picked up from the home office by FedEx and UPS Postal Express on a daily basis at no charge.

     

    Although some clients order directly through the company’s own website, approximately 80% of orders are through Amazon, and around $6k in sales per month are through eBay. Priced at $782,000, this ecommerce business truly has the potential to triple in revenue. A new owner could invest in more inventory and increase the number of vendors; with the right strategy in place, sales would go through the roof.

    PRICE $782,000 CASH FLOW $226,765

  • B2B Health & Wellness Technology & Consulting

    With a proprietary technology platform, evaluation tools, algorithms, and historical database already in place, the mission of this company is to provide health & wellness program services for corporations and small to medium-sized businesses nationwide! A full range of products and solutions are offered to clients, including numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.

     

    Most clients have a one-year contract and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.

     

    Priced at $675,000, a 10% down payment of $67,500 returns $117,005 in the first year after debt payments – a 173% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!

    PRICE $675,000 CASH FLOW $207,101

  • Amazon E-Commerce Dropship Vendor w/ $1.2M Cashflow

    This dropship vendor provides necessary janitorial, PPE, and office supplies through Amazon and other marketplaces! Using Channel Advisor software, which can manage up to 1 million SKUs, this business manages over 400,000 products with 20+ vendors, and resells on their website and marketplaces. They currently do no marketing or advertising.

    Every order placed online is drop-shipped directly from the wholesaler or manufacturer in 2-3 business days to the consumer/business – they carry little to no inventory and have almost no overhead. With an integrated ordering system already in place, their software is ideal for the high volume of products this company sells.

    • They continue to add 2-3 vendors per year, each providing a greater variety of products.  Recently, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices.
    • 95% of revenue comes from large name marketplace retailers, while 5% comes directly from the website.
    • 75% of website sales come from the consumer and 25% from business accounts.
    • Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability.
    • Providing quality products at a low price, the product mark-up is between 28-48%. Excellent relationships with the wholesalers help them deliver their low-price guarantee, as well as superb customer service.
    •  A small storage facility in the Southeast, US is currently used to handle returns to the wholesalers.
    This company priced at $3,025,000 is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. Securing additional contracts directly with hospitals and corporations would also boost sales.

    PRICE $3,025,000 CASH FLOW $1,151,411

  • Contract Manufacturer of Corporate & Collegiate Headwear, Bags, & Apparel

    With nearly $60M in sales in 2020, this contract manufacturing company has a full management staff already in place! Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production/manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already established, they have been able to solidify themselves in the market, acting as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors.

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days.

    Priced at $15,900,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $15,900,000 CASH FLOW $4,161,997

  • Mobile & Wireless Solutions for Manufacturers, Logistics & Distribution

    With a 96% recurring client base, this value-added reseller (VAR) focuses on traditional bar code technology, RFID technology, process improvement, equipment sales and service and custom software solutions. This company has also developed a Warehouse Mgmt. system that could be sold for $45K or if further developed for $60K. From solution concept to the design, development and implementation, their experienced team can deliver traditional mobile and wireless solutions. 60% of their revenue comes from sales of products like data capture equipment, printing equipment and labels while the remaining 40% is from services like custom software and web development, hardware repair and network installation. Their typical network installation project runs from $80K - over $250K with this company installing as much as 1M square feet of networks for their clients and in any given year completing 10-15 projects. Their networking portfolio encompasses small businesses to Fortune 500 facilities across the country with an impeccable track record.

     

    Primarily working with manufacturers, wholesalers, logistics and distribution, this company has been helping their clients succeed for 15 years by providing custom tailored solutions and results as promised and on time. With over 20 years professional software and database development expertise in-house, their staff's strong coupling of technical and business knowledge allows them to provide clients with world class solutions to their needs. The team consists of 7 full time employees including a senior VP, office manager, software developers with decades of experience and a process improvement resource. They also have 2-3 part time technicians who work for them as needed.

     

    This company is proud to partner with some of the most successful and regarded companies in the IT industry like Zebra, Data Logic, Honeywell, and Epson to name a few.

    This company has an outstanding opportunity for growth through development and upgrade of their WMS as well as going after more network installation projects.

    PRICE $1,875,000 CASH FLOW $549,991

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • NYC Marketing Agency - 27% Profit Margin

     

    The average client tenure for this New York City full-service creative agency is 14 years! Maintaining a 90+% recurring client base this agency provides the full gamut of advertising services across all media facets, with one simple philosophy: Great creative needs to change someone’s mind. The experienced team handles brand strategy, messaging strategy, campaign development, website development, CRM, email marketing, content marketing, employee engagement, marketing collateral and media planning and buying. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With over $71k in work-in-progress and a team with strong financial wherewithal, this company is prime for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 10% plus an equity roll of 10-15%.

    Primarily working with financial/retirement services, insurance, technology and healthcare categories, this agency is involved in industries that are playing an important role right now and using this opportunity to catch up in the digital space. The team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy and client service staff; consultants and freelancers are subcontracted out as needed. This senior focused staffing approach enables this agency to work quickly and efficiently even under the most difficult circumstances.   The core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies.

    The agency implemented a successful work-from-home strategy in early March to improve work/life balance among the team. The timeliness of this implementation allowed them to transition nearly seamlessly through the difficulties of the pandemic. The company is still being run 100% remotely and is going strong.

    Priced at $10,750,000, this agency has outstanding opportunity for growth. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

     

    PRICE $10,800,000 CASH FLOW $2,657,968

  • Leadership & Safety Training with 35% Profit Margin

    With over $2.2M in committed contracts already in place for 2021, this leadership & safety training company is already poised to increase their revenue by more than $1M! With a client base that consists of several manufacturing plants that have grown exponentially in the last year, the demand for safety training is through the roof. The company has a very healthy list of grants already approved, as well as a significant list of grants submitted and waiting for approval that will occupy much of 2021. There are also a large number of non-grant training and project initiatives that will positively impact future revenue. The owner will stay on for 2 years and carry 22.5% to prove a vested interest. Personnel includes the 2 owners, plus 4 certified trainers, 2 grant writers/managers, and 1 office coordinator; everyone on staff is cross-trained. Holding steady at a 95% customer retention rate, their services include leadership training, professional development, executive coaching, and safety training. 80% of their business is within a 150-mile radius, while the other 20% of their work is nationwide.

     

    Working out of a 3,600 sq. ft. office space at $2,950 per month and no inventory, the owners’ operating costs are extremely low. Assets include 5 vehicles used for training jobs that require travel, along with office furniture, fixtures, and equipment. The company’s typical sale size is $2,500-$4,500 per training session, depending on travel requirements. This company is the only private training organization that is partnered with public entities, giving them a huge strategic advantage in the grant world by allowing them to be able to utilize their platform and write more grant dollars than their competitors. Their grant writing managers work with businesses to identify training needs, write and submit the application, and manage grant training and fiscal responsibilities.

     

    Priced at $1,975,000, there is no slowdown in sight for this top notch company! Word-of-mouth referrals and 100% positive feedback from customers have given them a rock-solid reputation in the area. Working to promote e-learning, as well as looking into selling their training materials would certainly lead to revenue growth.

    PRICE $1,975,000 CASH FLOW $436,331

  • 32% Profit Margin - Commercial Surveillance Systems Installation

     

    This surveillance system installation company serves primarily commercial clients – apartment complexes, HOA’s, hotels, strip malls, restaurants, and hospitals! At a down payment of only 10%, a new owner would only be responsible for general oversight as the current owner lives out of the country 4 months of the year. Demand for surveillance systems is high in San Francisco – 51% of retail storefronts are currently unoccupied due to the pandemic, which means they want and need security and surveillance. With many opportunities for growth, a new owner could increase installation of temperature scanning cameras and video monitoring, expand to vertical markets (fire alarm installation, smart home systems, etc.), and add government & municipal contracts to further sales growth. Recently, this business has expanded services to add thermal monitoring for COVID. The company is focusing on recurring monthly revenue, which currently covers payroll expenses, prompting them to look for more service-based contracts, making sure each system has proper maintenance.

     

    They are increasing installation of temperature scanning cameras and video monitoring, expanding to vertical markets (fire alarm installation, smart home systems, etc.) and adding government and municipal contracts would be perfect opportunities for revenue growth.

    • Boasting a 32% profit margin already in 2021, they are well-known in Northern California
    • 80% of sales is in the San Francisco Bay area, 15% regionally, and 5% of their business is nationwide.
    • Highly experienced team with everyone on the team having a 4+ year tenure
    • Uses advanced tech like secure wireless camera networks, license plate capturing cameras and Point of Sale surveillance systems

    The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and lives out of the country 4 months out of the year. The team is standardizing their service contracts to include both remote support and hands-on support, with an obvious preference for services they can provide remotely. Their camera systems offer real-time surveillance and video monitoring to ensure real-time protection.

    PRICE $448,000 CASH FLOW $184,994

  • Media & Marketing Agency in Bulgaria - 29% Profit Margin

    This Firm has 64 employees (38 FT and 26 PT) making it turnkey and set up for an incoming buyer to take over. Silicon Valley of Eastern Europe – Sofia, Bulgaria.  The owner is willing to remain as the general manager for 3+ years! They boast a very diverse client base, with 30% being local and regional, and 70% being international clients.

    This top internationally recognized media management and marketing agency earns $2MM (BGN) in gross revenue and $784,000 (BGN) in cash flow.  The highly regarded team provides top to bottom media communications services including advising, training and education, graphic design, as well as crisis management.  The Seller, currently operating in an oversight capacity, is also willing to remain on as GM (if desired) for 3 years post-sale. This would ensure a smooth transition for not only clients but staff as well.  

    Completing over 5,000 projects in the past two decades, strategic creativity abounds amongst this team of seventy-four.  Specialists in crisis management, public affairs, and public relations work directly with clients to manage their brand through multi-faceted communication channels including social media sites, web site development, television, public appearances, media interaction, and radio.  This well-trained and educated team run day-to-day operations effectively while the owner is meeting with clients both in and out of the country and no billable hours.  Though a new owner would not need to travel, the team frequently travels locally, regionally, and internationally. 

    Fully equipped with beautiful furniture and fixtures, as well as cutting edge professional tools, the building is owned by the seller and is available for continued lease.

     

     

    PRICE $1,400,000 CASH FLOW $784,000

Health/Dental/Professional Medical Services (6)

  • Medical Equipment Renter with 1,800+ Patients

    With 18 qualified and knowledgeable employees, this home medical and respiratory equipment provider has been established for more than 50 years! Personnel includes 8 full-time and 10 part-time employees in customer service, billing, delivery, and respiratory; they qualify patients to receive equipment and products that will be covered by the client’s insurance plan. This company provides guidance to clinicians and other professional healthcare workers on how to request equipment and services for patients. With over $600,000 in assets and a 15% profit margin, sales and cash flow grew in 2020 even amidst COVID-19. This company’s primary value proposition is that they help patients and their families navigate the complex health care environment and obtain medical equipment and supplies. They currently have 1,800+ patients with equipment on rent; rental income is approximately 72% of monthly revenue. They have long term relationships with the medical community and are a preferred provider for the country of Santa Clara Health System.

     

    With limited marketing, clients come in from referrals, insurance, and contracting. Some areas of growth include implementing integrated web commerce and telephony systems and home fill oxygen solution for portable tanks, bring billing process in house or negotiate better rates for outsourced billing, expand wound vacuum referrals and lymphedema therapy referrals, and explore telemedicine remote monitoring services for Medicare patients.

     

    The two owners are planning for retirement and have set no specific time frame for involvement but anticipate some form of personal service agreements and/or W2 employment for undetermined length of time after the transaction. They want a successful transition to ensure clients remain with the company long term.

    PRICE $1,650,000 CASH FLOW $432,448

  • Online Medical Equipment: 100% Dropship

    This completely remote internet-enabled, multi-channel distributor of medical, surgical and therapy supplies and equipment provides over 40,000 discounted medical supplies and was established in 1989. As a pioneer in online medical supplies, this 100% drop shipper runs on thin margins to provide services to all, with 80% of the business serving consumers (e-commerce) and the other 20% serving businesses. By ordering medical supplies in advance, users and organizations, including nursing homes and assisted living facilities, can bring in cost efficiencies. As a BBB accredited business with A+ rating, they are able to keep their prices low by being an online company and not having the added expense of a retail store.

    This company never sees the product but is simply the middleman between manufacturers/suppliers and the consumer. Therefore, no lease is needed, and the owner can run the company from any location. The current owner is thinking about retirement but is wanting to stay with the company for as long as needed to continue to work and aid in the transition.

    COVID-19 has brought in new opportunities such as wholesale and brokering. These areas can continue to be expanded on to further increase sales and profit margins. Their current relationship with manufacturers and suppliers as well as their reputation in customer service has allowed the company to continue in their success and provide low-cost new quality products.

    At the purchase price of $1,075,000, a 10% down payment of $102,800 returns $179,811 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 167% return on investment.

    PRICE $1,075,000 CASH FLOW $318,434

  • In-Home Health Care in Southeast Iowa

    This private and locally owned home health care agency is 95% referral based and has a 5-star Medicare rating! They provide a variety of in-home care services like hygiene assistance, diet monitoring, housekeeping, errands, caring companionship, respite care, chronic and acute medical problems, post-surgical, and physical and speech therapy. Serving patients from pediatric to geriatric, this company is certified by the State of Iowa for Medicare and Medicaid and their 5-star Medicare rating proves excellence from member satisfaction surveys, plans, and health care providers. With the current owner involved in 1% of the business operations and administrative work, the administrator handles the majority the operations. The company has 28 qualified and trained personnel with a full-time business administrator, office manager, office assistant, and clinical manager, along with 2 full-time field nurses, 5 full-time home health aides, and 12 full-time W2 independent therapists. They also have a part-time care manager and field nurse with 3 part-time home health aides.

     

    Serving 9 counties in Southeast Iowa, this company provides coverage for workman's comp claims and private pay and, for a client’s convenience, directly bill to their insurance company. They provide a safe, compassionate, innovative health care community that listens, learns, and responds collaboratively with patients, while maintaining a culture of care.

     

    This business currently does not have active marketing, due to the already high capacity of patient care. A new owner could expand the service area and increase clientele with marketing and the hiring of more staff. There is also growth in the private sector. It is an area that is quite profitable when utilized correctly as there are no Medicare, CHAP, Medicaid rules and regulations to follow. This is for non-skilled services or contracted services. This decreases the overhead and workload for the nurses and office.At the price of $248,000, a 10% down payment of $24,800 returns $48,986 in the first year after debt payments resulting in a 198% return on investment!

    PRICE $248,000 CASH FLOW $80,966

  • Audiology Clinic with 56% Profit Margin

    With long-existing nursing home and veteran contracts, this audiology clinic has had over 200+ clients in the last five years! Since the inception of the company in 1993, they have seen close to 1,000 different patients. The clinic saw a 56% profit margin in 2020, with two different offices in West Point and Fremont, Nebraska. This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions. They serve up to a 100-mile radius of West Point, with the audiologist/owner traveling a few times a week to provide services in nursing homes and to veterans.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services. At the purchase price of $475,000, a 10% down payment of $47,500 returns $89,320 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 188% return on investment.

    PRICE $475,000 CASH FLOW $150,572

  • Occupational Healthcare Provider – 36% Profit Margin

    This double location occupational healthcare provider in Delaware has a 95% recurring client base! With a 36% profit margin in 2020, this company provides a variety of occupational services that includes workers compensation, immigration exams, CDL exams, travel medicine, physicals, drug screens, TB tests, and COVID-19 vaccinations. The current staff includes the owner and 11 others. The owner is a full-time M.D. who spends 80% of their time in direct patient care, 15% in administrative work, and 5% in occupational health evaluation and labs; they hold the following certifications: DE WC, DOT, Civil Surgeon, and MRO. The part-time staff includes a Nurse Practitioner, a Physician’s Assistant, a Billing Manager, 4 Medical Assistants, 2 Registered Nurses, and another Medical Doctor. This company also has a full-time Office Manager.

     

    The goal of this company is to provide occupational healthcare and travel medicine to the residents, businesses, and vacationers in Sussex County. They cherish the opportunity to assist employers in managing their most important asset: valued employees. They believe the quality of medical care employers provide their employees speaks louder than words. They maintain open lines of communications with employees, employers, case managers, and insurers with the single purpose of returning employees back to work as soon as medically possible.

     

    Priced at $595,000, a down payment of $59,500 returns $120,922 in the first year after debt payments which is a 203% return on investment! A new owner could grow the business by expanding services, implementing a marketing strategy, increasing staff and hours of operations, and capitalizing on the facilitation of vaccines.

    PRICE $595,000 CASH FLOW $204,109

  • Vet Practice in Fairfield County – Absentee Owned

    With a 39% profit margin in 2020, this absentee owned vet practice in Connecticut has been well-regarded in the community since 2015! Located in Fairfield County, the practice is an AAHA accredited clinic that serves small animal clients in their family-like atmosphere. The facility has two exam rooms, a reception area, prep area, and over $278,000 in assets to ensure the best possible care for their four-legged friends. The growing client base has contributed to the year-over-year expansion of this business, but the current staff is capable of accepting new clients without sacrificing high-quality care. The team currently consists of one part-time and one full-time veterinarian as well as two techs and two assistants. The absentee owner currently operates in an oversight capacity, making this an excellent opportunity to acquire a successful practice that is self-managed.  

     

    The 2,500 square foot space features two exam rooms, prep area, in-house lab, radiology, and kennel area.  There is room to add additional veterinarians to the staff, increasing revenue, solidifying a wider client base, as well as it being an opportunity to extend operating hours, if desired. There are no hospital services on-site, but this clinic has partnered with local animal hospitals for emergency or complicated care cases. Growth could be found in expanding hours to accommodate evening clients or emergency services that do not rise to the level of hospital care. 

    Currently operating in an oversight capacity, the owner is not responsible for billable hours at this location. With a full-time manager in place, this practice is well-positioned to continue operations.

    Some highlights of this business:

    • Absentee ownership
    • 39% profit margin
    • Partnership with local animal hospitals
    • An AAHA accredited clinic

    2,500 sq. ft. with exam rooms, prep area, in-house lab, radiology, and kennel area

    PRICE $2,125,000 CASH FLOW $485,643

Vets/Pet Care/Animal Product (2)

  • Dog Training in South Central Nebraska with 67% Profit Margin

    This dog training & boarding business is selling at a low 2 multiple with a 367% return on investment! With 5 experienced staff members and boasting a 67% profit margin, they specialize in behavior modification and service dog training, which sets this company apart from the competition. They also have proven dog training methods and results. This boutique canine training business in Central Nebraska is well-positioned for growth and expansion into unique markets. The facility offers classes for individuals looking for dog behavior modification, basic obedience, and hunt training.  Boarding and daycare are available for those who require long-term or daytime care.  Off-site classes are available for veterinarians, rescue groups, as well as for corporate and independent pet stores.  Social media reviews are superb and truly show the effusive customer satisfaction with this company and their results.  The owner trains new employees and oversees operations.  The staff is competent and can manage the day-to-day tasks with little oversight.

    The facility is well-suited to this business.  It features a 25 x 30 building for training and kennels, with three exercise yards.  There is a secondary office and training building on the property as well.  This space is potentially available outside the sale of the business and is available for continued lease in the short-term.  Expansion could be found by moving this business to a larger city to gain additional customers or potential foot traffic.  Additional growth may be found in building website traffic and exposure, adding more off-site training classes, as well as adding trainers to the staff to increase capacity. A new owner would not need to have experience with dog training to take over the business; exceptional customer service skills would be ideal.

    PRICE $310,000 CASH FLOW $156,689

  • Vet Practice in Fairfield County – Absentee Owned

    With a 39% profit margin in 2020, this absentee owned vet practice in Connecticut has been well-regarded in the community since 2015! Located in Fairfield County, the practice is an AAHA accredited clinic that serves small animal clients in their family-like atmosphere. The facility has two exam rooms, a reception area, prep area, and over $278,000 in assets to ensure the best possible care for their four-legged friends. The growing client base has contributed to the year-over-year expansion of this business, but the current staff is capable of accepting new clients without sacrificing high-quality care. The team currently consists of one part-time and one full-time veterinarian as well as two techs and two assistants. The absentee owner currently operates in an oversight capacity, making this an excellent opportunity to acquire a successful practice that is self-managed.  

     

    The 2,500 square foot space features two exam rooms, prep area, in-house lab, radiology, and kennel area.  There is room to add additional veterinarians to the staff, increasing revenue, solidifying a wider client base, as well as it being an opportunity to extend operating hours, if desired. There are no hospital services on-site, but this clinic has partnered with local animal hospitals for emergency or complicated care cases. Growth could be found in expanding hours to accommodate evening clients or emergency services that do not rise to the level of hospital care. 

    Currently operating in an oversight capacity, the owner is not responsible for billable hours at this location. With a full-time manager in place, this practice is well-positioned to continue operations.

    Some highlights of this business:

    • Absentee ownership
    • 39% profit margin
    • Partnership with local animal hospitals
    • An AAHA accredited clinic

    2,500 sq. ft. with exam rooms, prep area, in-house lab, radiology, and kennel area

    PRICE $2,125,000 CASH FLOW $485,643

Advertising/Marketing/Media/Print/Production (2)

  • NYC Marketing Agency - 27% Profit Margin

     

    The average client tenure for this New York City full-service creative agency is 14 years! Maintaining a 90+% recurring client base this agency provides the full gamut of advertising services across all media facets, with one simple philosophy: Great creative needs to change someone’s mind. The experienced team handles brand strategy, messaging strategy, campaign development, website development, CRM, email marketing, content marketing, employee engagement, marketing collateral and media planning and buying. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With over $71k in work-in-progress and a team with strong financial wherewithal, this company is prime for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 10% plus an equity roll of 10-15%.

    Primarily working with financial/retirement services, insurance, technology and healthcare categories, this agency is involved in industries that are playing an important role right now and using this opportunity to catch up in the digital space. The team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy and client service staff; consultants and freelancers are subcontracted out as needed. This senior focused staffing approach enables this agency to work quickly and efficiently even under the most difficult circumstances.   The core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies.

    The agency implemented a successful work-from-home strategy in early March to improve work/life balance among the team. The timeliness of this implementation allowed them to transition nearly seamlessly through the difficulties of the pandemic. The company is still being run 100% remotely and is going strong.

    Priced at $10,750,000, this agency has outstanding opportunity for growth. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

     

    PRICE $10,800,000 CASH FLOW $2,657,968

  • Nationwide Multi-Year Government Contracts for Full-Service Marketing & PR

    Established 1996 and with multi-year sub-contracts ranging from $60-$420K per year for three to five years, this award winning full-service public relations and marketing firm has been serving their clients statewide, nationally and internationally for 20+ years.  Average value of prime contracts is $1M for 5-6 years and majority of their clients are recurring with 10+ year average tenure. They have a total of 12 clients, with multiple being contracts with state and federal agencies. One of their main clients with 6 multi-year contracts is recognized nationwide and internationally for its leadership and innovation and in many ways is ten years ahead of other states because this company has more experience in next generation intelligent transportation systems than any other communications and training firms in the country. From their Southeast US 5,500 square feet office with $300K worth of assets that includes digital production equipment, the firm provides public relations, digital marketing & advertising, knowledge transfer, research & strategic services all under one roof. With a 25% profit margin, they primarily serve government agencies, but also have clients in construction, automotive, and emerging technologies. In addition, they have a robust marketing process that has culminated in 8000+ industry leaders and decisionmakers who receive company e-newsletters on a regular basis.

    The firm’s reputation is so strong in the transportation industry it is consistently sought out as a teaming partner by an impressive list of engineering, intelligent transportation, and planning firms Like HDR, Atkins and Booz & Allen. They win large, impressive contracts competing against strong incumbents due to their proprietary processes and scalable platforms for RFP responses, as well as strong business relationships.

    They have a team of 31 highly skilled fulltime employees that include a creative director who has won numerous awards for the branding, websites and marketing collateral he has developed for this company’s clients. In general, many employees have 10+ year tenure with the company and have professional backgrounds in journalism.

    With the results of the presidential election, the public relations industry is convinced that an infrastructure bill is imminent and this company is positioned to ride this wave of opportunity and grow because they have been leading outreach efforts for next generation intelligent transportation systems and connected vehicles for 15 years. In addition, they have more experience in these future focused specialties than any other communications and training firm in the nation.

    PRICE $4,200,000 CASH FLOW $990,945

Maintenance/Service/Trades (19)

  • Fire Protection System Engineering Firm – 60% Profit Margin

    With year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations!  Established for over 25 years, this fire protection engineering firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The Senior Consultant has over 20 years of experience in the fire protection industry and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $4,775,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $4,775,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Residential Roofing Services in Iowa

    A project manager who runs the day-to-day operations is already in place for this company! With a solid reputation in the market, this Central Iowa business has substantial growth opportunities. Well-established for over 15 years in Des Moines, they primarily serve the residential market, doing roof repairs and maintenance, as well as gutter and siding repair. Offering high-quality Owens Corning, Malarkey, and GAF roofing products to their customers, their highly experienced subcontracted crews pride themselves on ensuring each roof is in the best condition possible. For each customer, they provide an in-depth roof inspection to assess damage and determine the scope of repairs needed, bid the project within 24 hours, and fulfill the necessary roofing services within 2 weeks. While there is some seasonality to the business due to weather conditions in the winter months, the other nine months more than make up for the temporary lack in revenue. Their average gross profit ranges from 35-45%; the company’s sales hit $1.4M in 9 months’ time last year, with a gross profit of 39%.

     

    Employees consist of the owner, who handles general oversight, and 1 Project Manager/Salesperson who runs the day-to-day operations. They have a well-established roster of go-to subcontractors who comprise the roofing crews and are assigned based on project size and scope. Assets include two 2020 H&H 7x14 Dump Trailers, a 2019 Chevy 2500, and a 2018 Chevy 2500, as well as 2 laptops, 2 cell phones, an established website, and project management software, JobNimbus.

     

    Priced at $605,000, a down payment of $60,500 returns $120,650 in the first year after debt payments – a 199% return on investment!  There is tremendous growth potential for a new owner – expanding the service area, increasing the sales force, and going after more commercial work would undoubtedly boost revenue.

    PRICE $605,000 CASH FLOW $188,650

  • Commercial Glazing Contractor in OKC

    With nearly $6M in sales in 2020 and $7.5M already in their backlog, this commercial glazing contractor has been established in Oklahoma City for over 70 years! Services include design, fabrication, manufacturing, and installation of aluminum curtainwall, storefront, heavy glass doors, glass handrails, and swinging & sliding aluminum doors. Working out of a 35,000 sq. ft. factory, the team has top-notch CNC capabilities that are unmatched in the area. There are 45 full-time employees, including the owner, who handles general oversight, 3 Project Managers, 2 Estimators, 1 CAD Drafter, 1 Superintendent, 5 Foremen, 2 in Accounting, 10 in the factory, and a highly skilled team in the field handling installations. Their main focus is on mid to high-rise towers; sale size ranges from $250k-$3M, with $500k-$700k billed out each month. Most work (90%) is bid by invitation from the GC, with work secured 6-12 months into future. Along with $7.5M worth of signed contracts, the company has $3.5M in their pipeline.

     

    Because it is such a specialized industry, the company uses the Union from time to time out of Texas and New Mexico. Their participation agreement with the union allows them to remain independent and hire from the union when needed for large projects. The company’s bonding capacity of $12M, along with their exceptional factory, equipment, and manpower, allows them to bid on monumental projects in the area.

     

    Priced at $2,000,000, growth potential is tremendous for a new owner. Expanding the service area into surrounding states and pursuing more high-rise projects would lead to a huge revenue boost. The factory, equipment, client relationships, industry reputation, and highly experienced team is already in place. A new owner could step in and take this company to the next level. A 12.5% down payment of $250,000 returns $283,695 in the first year after debt payments – a 113% return on investment!

    PRICE $2,000,000 CASH FLOW $539,461

  • Non-Commercial Aircraft Inspections & Maintenance w/ 25+ Recurring Clients

    This corporate aircraft maintenance & inspection business has $1.2M in projected revenue for 2021! With 25+ recurring clients, their primary customer base consists of aircraft managers and brokers.  Aircraft maintenance accounts include routine maintenance, inspections, and annual inspections required by the FAA. Two FAA certified mechanics lead the team – one IA Certified and one AP certified. Multi-engine planes require inspections after a certain number of hours flown. Current customers allow access to a maintenance portal that shows hours logged per aircraft, giving them the capability of knowing the work that needs done in the near future and securing the work with the aircraft managers. The FAA requires a logbook entry for each inspection; this team requires payment from their customer prior to logging the inspection, ensuring full and on-time payments each time. Sale sizes range from $2k (for small maintenance jobs) to $22k for an average inspection, all the way up to $50-$60k for the larger maintenance projects.

     

    In June of 2020, the business expanded into three hangers, each approximately 3,600 sq. ft. Currently, one hanger is being rented by an outside party ($2,000/month), and one hanger is a double without an inner wall. The rented hanger was built to allow the business to pursue military contracts, as those planes require a separate facility from commercial/general aviation.

     

    Priced at $649,000, a buyer would see a 141% return on investment in the first year after debt payments. With ample room for growth, this business has tremendous potential!  Pursuing military contracts would boost revenue, as well as taking on ex-military aircraft mechanics in apprentice roles for 3 months and setting up satellite offices at other airports that can’t justify a full-time maintenance facility.

    PRICE $649,000 CASH FLOW $174,945

  • Commercial Tile Contractor with 30% Profit Margin

    All labor is outsourced for this commercial tile installation company, keeping fixed cost on labor and overhead incredibly low! Clients include General Contractors and Construction Managers, and currently the work is primarily for service stations throughout Texas. There is one part-time W2 employee (the owner’s spouse), who works approximately 10 hours/week from a home office doing estimates, purchasing, coordinating deliveries, scheduling installations with the labor force, and bookkeeping; all labor is subcontracted out. Sales could easily climb into the $2M-$3M range by actively submitting more bids, expanding the product line to include other types of flooring, pursuing work in schools, grocery stores, retail stores, and entertainment/restaurants, and by tapping into the residential market. Service station tile contracts generally run anywhere from $20k-$120k. The company currently has 10 projects on the books worth approximately $238k; the average project takes 7 days to complete.

     

    This business is not consumer-based, so there was no COVID impact on sales – clients did not put a moratorium on construction projects. The company does advertise in the Blue Book, which gives them requests for bids via email – they currently have nearly 20 open bids, along with the 8 projects in progress.

     

    Priced at $720,000, a 10% down payment of $72,000 returns $120,857 in the first year after debt payments – a 168% return on investment! With long-standing relationships already in place with General Contractors in the area, a new owner could take this business to the next level.  The current owner bought the business in 2015, when sales were $250k and grew revenue to $3.5M by 2018, with at least 5 bids per day and a much larger client base, proving that this business is capable of tremendous growth. They intentionally downsized the business in early 2019 (semi-retirement) and chose to keep sales in the $600k-$700k range. The company has seen sales in $3M range in the past and could easily reach those heights again under new ownership.

    PRICE $720,000 CASH FLOW $213,702

  • Turnkey Solar Solutions with $2M in Secured Work

    With over 400 current clients in Iowa, Illinois, and Wisconsin, this turnkey solar solutions company has $2M in secured work! Providing solar integration for residential & commercial clients, the business is well-established in the region. Based out of a 4,000 sq. ft. space in Dubuque, the team has an experienced Master Electrician and Project Manager already in place; install and electrical work is subcontracted out as needed. With over 400 installs since the company’s inception and a pipeline of $15-17M, warranties have expired, which could certainly lead to service contracts being offered and a boost in revenue. They offer a variety of services including design, procurement, construction, project financing, quality assurance, and consulting. The 2 owners currently share operations and development roles. The range in price for residential customers (50% of their client base) is $17-$25k. On the commercial side, it can range from $20k-$2M, depending on the size and scope of the project. There is a well-established reputation with some large-name commercial clients in the region, with long-standing relationships ranging from 2-7 years. The company uses top-notch Helioscope software for project design and industry-leading Energy Toolbase software for proposals.

     

    Assets include a 2021 Chevy 2500, a 2015 Ford F150, a 2015 Chevy 1500, and a work van, totaling more than $80,000 in value. There are substantial growth opportunities for a new owner. As electrification is increasing throughout the country, customers looking to take advantage of the tax incentives and economic benefits of solar integration will only increase. Expanding the client base in the commercial and industrial space would lead to tremendous growth.

     

    Priced at $3,300,000, a 12.5% down payment of $412,500 returns $409,177 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 99% return on investment.

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $831,191

  • Erosion & Shoreline Control, Site Prep for Civil & Industrial

    This heavy civil construction business has 97 full-time employees in place and over 20 active projects at one time! Their sale size ranges from $10k to $5M, and they have averaged over 225 jobs per year for the last 3 years. Already on their 70th job of 2021 and $11M in backlog, work is plentiful for this Texas company. They offer a vast array of heavy civil construction services, including  building streets, subdivisions, commercial site preparation, and industrial work at petrochemical plants, as well as utility system construction, earthwork, site preparation, coastal erosion control, shoreline protection, and general maintenance. Clients are comprised of private developers, industrial, city, county, and state governments, and GC’s. This versatile offering of services and diverse client base works in this company’s favor, as they don’t rely heavily on one client or sector. Approximately 65% of their work is as the GC, primarily for the county, city, or state. The other 35% involves working for the GC on a project as the sub. While they do have a go-to list of subcontractors when needed, the majority of the time, it’s their own team doing the work.

     

    The team works out of a 6,000 sq. ft. office building located on 5 acres of land; their facilities also include 1 heavy equipment shop, 1 truck shop (2,000 sq. ft. each), and 1 fuel & oil shed (1,200 sq. ft.). The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and leases it back to the business for $9,000/month. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has long-standing relationships with customers and GC’s alike; they are able to keep their service area within a 100-mile radius of the office. 

     

    Utilizing top notch ComputerEase, HCSS, AGTEK, and Trimble software, this well-respected team receives invites to bid from GC’s they’ve worked with over the years; they also subscribe to websites that send notices of upcoming projects that are up for public bidding, with a 20-25% success rate. Priced at $20,250,000, there is ample opportunity for growth. Expanding the service area, actively pursuing more bids, or opening a satellite office in an area nearby where the population is booming would certainly lead to an increase in revenue.

    PRICE $20,250,000 CASH FLOW $4,316,388

  • Commercial Roofing Services – over $13.5M in Sales

    With over $13.5M in sales in 2020, this roofing & sheet metal company has over 70 employees in place! Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. With expertise in membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work, this business has considerable repeat business with general contractors, construction managers, and owners in the area. Their diversified client base includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,525,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,525,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Sewer Pipeline Inspections in Honolulu with 55% Profit Margin

    With over $2M in sales in the last 12 months and nearly $2M in assets, this sewer pipeline inspection company in Honolulu has been established for over 15 years! Specializing in CCTV inspections of pipelines, their top-notch equipment and vehicles allow their well-trained PACP-certified staff to meet the needs of their client base, 90% of which consists of engineers for construction companies, municipalities, or consulting engineers. They also provide manhole/corrosion inspections, smoke testing, flow monitoring, and sewer/pipeline cleaning. Over $1M worth of vehicles including 3 CCTV trucks, 3 cleaning combo trucks, and 4 pickup trucks are part of the nearly $2M in business assets, as well $500k worth of generators, hand tools, computer equipment, and camera equipment, making the bank loan nearly 50% collateralized. The team consists of 10 full-time employees, including 1 Director of Operations, 1 Quality Control Supervisor, 1 Salesperson, and high skilled CCTV and Vactor Operators and field technicians. The owner currently manages business development, accounting, operations, administration, and IT and is willing to stay on for 2-3 years post-sale to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    The company’s average sale size is approximately $20k, with an average of 10 work orders per month. Currently, the business has $478k worth of work in their pipeline. The company was deemed essential during COVID, allowing them to increase their rates due to the increase in the need for PPE gear and adding trucks to accommodate social distancing guidelines.

     

    Priced at $4,025,000 and with a well-established reputation already in place, a new owner could easily boost sales by pursuing other areas in the general industry, such as construction and storm sewer system services. A 12.5% down payment of $503,125 returns $487,883 in the first year after debt payments – a 97% return on investment!

    PRICE $4,025,000 CASH FLOW $1,155,757

  • Environmental Consulting Services with $2.7M in Backlog

    With $2.7M in backlog, this environmental and engineering service provider has been serving developers, engineers, manufacturers, and municipalities since 1985! A highly trained team of 41 employees are in place, including 9 managers. Split into service groups, their qualified personnel are trained and certified as environmental professionals, mold inspectors, asbestos inspectors, asbestos management planners, professional geologists, brownfield redevelopment specialists, professional wetland scientists, underground storage tank professionals, remediation specialists, hazardous materials managers, and regulatory compliance managers. The owner/president would stay on for 1 year to aid in the transition, but for the right fit, would continue in sales/mediation for up to 10 years.

     

    Completing aver 12,000 projects in 28 states, mostly east of the Mississippi, this company has also done work in Mexico, Canada, and Eastern Europe. A continued area of growth is to expand the service concentration outside Michigan. Their work in process is nearly $840k, with a strong stream of work coming in.

     

    This company’s corporate headquarters is located in Brighton, Michigan. But there are additional offices located in Grand Rapids, Detroit, and Trenton. They even currently have a missionary office in Lexington, Kentucky out of a staff person’s home. At the purchase price of $3,195,000, a 12.5% down payment of $399,375 returns $389,992 in the first year after debt payments. That is a 97% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,195,000 CASH FLOW $879,305

  • Scaffolding Equipment Rental Company – over $13M in Assets

    With a three-year average cash flow of $5,457,808, this company offers top-of-the-line scaffolding equipment to a diverse customer base of 500 customers in the Twin Cities metro area! They currently have 15 recurring clients that include general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair and installation contractors. They install, dismantle, rent, and sell frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms with 59% of their revenue coming from rentals. With only $1M in capex, this business has over $13M in assets and over $3.5M in work-in-progress and backlog. They are on average 70% utilized with about $9.9M in inventory out for rentals on a monthly basis. With $3.9M in hydro mobile inventory (70 – 75 units) they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 1-3 units of a competing brand. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market.

     

    This company does little to no marketing or advertising because they have recurring clients due to their top-notch customer service, delivery options and the quality of indoor and outdoor scaffolding. This business has a sister company (23% of revenue) that is Union based. Their current building space is 50,000 square feet with 3,000 square feet being the office building and 47,000 square feet of warehouse. There is also 1.2 acres yard for outside storage. 

     

    In any given month, they have around 150 work orders and their large projects that go for longer than on year are greater than $1M in value. Assets include almost $11M in scaffolding inventory and $1.6M in vehicles like trucks (5), 27-foot straight trucks, one-ton truck (1), pickups (20). Their current backlog of projects is about $3.5M and they are over $13M sales for 2020. At any given time, they have anywhere from 45 – 60 employees with 21 of them being office workers like sales representatives, office managers and the rest being laborers and contractors.

     

    Two of the owners focus primarily on sales and the third owner manages day to day business but they are currently transitioning responsibilities to other employees. Priced at $22,950,000, this is a business that is positioned to grow in the scaffolding space through acquisition of more inventory and expansion into different cities.

    PRICE $22,950,000 CASH FLOW $5,457,808

  • Solar Panel Install Since 1977

    This Southeast Iowa company has been well-known throughout the Midwest region since 1977! Specializing in solar installation, sign installation, and electrical construction for farmers, commercial & residential clients, and the industrial sector, the business has $3M worth of secured work to take them through the rest of 2020 and into 2021. The exceptionally highly skilled team includes 2 owners, one of which is an Electrical Engineer – the other is a Master Electrician and superintendent, along with a CFO, 1 accountant, 4 solar crew leaders, 6 electrical crew leaders, 2 sign installers, 1 FT mechanic, 2 assistant project managers, 2 solar sales reps, and 15-20 electrical apprentices to assist as needed. Their facilities are comprised of a 2,000 sq. ft. office/crew space, a 2,400 sq. ft. mechanic shop, 9,000 sq. ft. trailer parking space, and a combined total of 34,200 sq. ft. in equipment/material storage and truck parking.

     

    The business has a considerable amount of assets, including several cube vans, trucks, trailers, generators, electric benders, welders, trenchers, backhoes, and an extensive amount of other equipment and tools.  They use Foundation, which is a construction specific software designed for remote use, as well as PVsyst and Helioscope for solar design, and ConEst for estimating services.

     

    With a solid team and an outstanding reputation in place, this company’s services are sought out by solar developers in the region. Substantial growth opportunities are on the horizon, as important strategic partnerships are developing, and the solar industry is soaring.

    PRICE $6,600,000 CASH FLOW $1,345,934

  • Industrial Cleaning and Maintenance — 90% Collateralized

    This oil field service company specializes in turnaround and industrial cleaning services for oil, gas and utility companies and is 90% collateralized! Handling all aspects for the disposal of drilling waste in the oil and gas sector, this company currently has 250 clients with 50 of those recurring. 70% of their revenue comes from turnaround and industrial cleaning services; the other 30% is a mixture of maintenance, water delivery, vegetation control, water truck services, mobile steaming and equipment rentals. Personnel includes 1 Regional Manager, 1 Dispatcher, 1 Safety Officer, 1 Mechanic, 2 Junior Mechanics, 1 Shop Hand/Assistant, and 15-22 Operators/Assistants. The 2 owners work remotely doing general business oversight and accounting & payroll management. Their vast array of high-quality equipment is comprised of hydro vacs, combo vacs, tank trucks, straight vacs, water trucks, mobile steamers, pressure trucks, and maintenance units. The business is COR Certified, Comply Works Certified, and belongs to ISNetworld.

    The company’s leased space consists of an 11-acre industrial fully fenced yard site, a 750 sq. ft. office with 4 maintenance bays, and a 5-bedroom crew house.

    Promoting their one-stop-shop service, hiring a salesperson, increasing truck utilization, and expanding into neighboring communities would undoubtedly grow the business and increase revenue.

    Some key information:

    • Tremendous signage, word-of-mouth referrals, and a rock-solid reputation gives this company a firm grasp on the area.
    • 70% of the company’s revenue comes from turnaround and industrial cleaning services.
    • This company currently has 250 clients with 50 of those recurring.
    At the purchase price of $2,875,000 CAD, this business is 90% collateralized.

    PRICE $2,875,000 CASH FLOW $1,002,929

  • Wireless Tech Company with over $6M in Sales

    This business with over $6M in sales has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $7,930,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

  • HVAC, Electrical, Security & Traffic Signals – 80% Recurring Clients

    This multi-service business has an incredibly versatile team of employees in place – 90% of their work is self-performed!  With an 80% recurring client base, this company has an average WIP worth $2M. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. Less than 20% of business is new construction and they have 25+ recurring clients that span different industries. They have existing government contracts with the city and department of transportation.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services.

     

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. They are well-known all over the Carolinas. Work is typically steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office.

     

    Priced at $6,050,000, this is a business that is in a position to grow in the construction industry. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide.  

    PRICE $6,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • 70+ Years for KC HVAC Design, Fabrication, and Installation

    With a 22,000 sq. ft. fabrication shop and 41 skilled personnel on staff, this HVAC design and installation company has been in operation for 70 years! Clients for this business include education, manufacturing, industrial, medical, government, and municipalities. The team is comprised of 9 office staff, along with 4 in the shop, 7 service staff, and 21 field employees. Not only do they specialize in new construction and renovation ventures, but they successfully work on refrigeration systems and manage projects as prime contractors as well.  The team focuses mainly on new construction (40%) and renovations (45%), and their service department accounts for 15% of annual revenues.  Prime contracts amount to about 15-20% of work performed. The service department performs approximately $1.5M per year, while hard bid projects are in the $10.5M range.

    This multi-faceted business is held in high regard by the general contractors, architects, and engineers in the Kansas City Metro.  Their increasing revenues show that this healthy business is growing organically through positive word-of-mouth reviews and high-quality workmanship. 

    Priced at $1,725,000, a new owner could easily continue the current successful trajectory, as well as grow the business by expanding the maintenance and service contracts.  The business operates from a complex that has ample space for all current operations with room for continued expansion.  A large 30,000 square foot building features a 22,000 square foot shop which is the fabrication hub and the remaining spaces (8,000 square feet) are utilized as storage warehousing.  The lots are both paved and offer plenty of parking and working space.   

    PRICE $1,725,000 CASH FLOW $676,827

  • HVAC & Plumbing in Northern California with 70 Employees

    This HVAC and plumbing company in Northern California has seen year-over-year sales growth since 2017 with nearly $13M in sales in 2020!  Serving the Sacramento area since 2003, they complete HVAC (70%) and plumbing services (30%). With an on-site fully automated sheet metal fabrication shop, the company is capable of manufacturing ductwork up to 14 gauge, plumbing and piping, as well as architectural sheet metal and flashings. There are 70 employees on staff, including controllers, foremen, project managers, assistants, and a field/shop work force.  The owner has built a solid customer base with a focus on serving schools, government institutions, and commercial office buildings, and many customers have been with this company for over fifteen years.  The owner currently focuses on lead generation, some estimations, bonding, and general oversight of the business.

     

    Operations are managed from a large 14,000 square foot location in the Sacramento Valley area.  The office has 2,000 square feet of space with a reception area, private offices, and staff spaces.  The remaining 12,000 square feet is dedicated to warehouse, storage, and the fabrication shop. 

     

    Priced at $6,900,000, there is huge potential for continued growth and success. The industry in Northern California always has room for expansion and the company could take on additional available work in the region.  Another area for development could be found in adding a service department and considering the implementation of maintenance and inspection contracts.

    PRICE $6,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,915,783

  • Directional Drilling for Major Communication Carriers in Phoenix

    With over $2.2M in sales and a 27% profit margin in 2020, the client base for this directional drilling company consists of major communication carriers and utility companies in the Phoenix area. This business is recession proof, as wireless carriers and utilities are essential. Nearly 90% of the work is done for a wide range of major communication carriers, and most work is completed by their highly skilled in-house team of eight people; subcontractors are hired as needed for larger concrete or asphalt restoration projects.  Approximately 90% of work completed is directional drilling and laying fiber optic cables.    Work is typically steady throughout the year and most projects are completed in the Phoenix valley area and within a 50-mile radius of the office. The current owner does no labor and provides bids and oversight. He is willing to stay on for up to one year to assist with the transition.

    The business operates from a leased quarter-acre property that has plenty of room for the mobile office as well as storing equipment.  Assets include 5 trailers, 1 mini excavator, 1 Subsite TKD Locator, 2 Ditch Witch Vacuums, 2 Ditch Witch Drills, plus all of the necessary tools and equipment, along with $112,500 worth of vehicles.

    Priced at $2,350,000, this company has a solid foundation, positive long-term relationships with primary contractors, low overhead, and many potential paths for growth.  First, a new owner could capitalize on current resources that allow the team to take on larger or additional contracts throughout the year.  Second, increased focus could be paid to building upon current work for gas utilities as this company receives many inquiries about availability for this specialization.  A third area would be to expand the restoration of concrete and asphalt associated with the current drilling contracts.  With a reasonable investment, this could be a large area for potential growth.

    PRICE $2,350,000 CASH FLOW $611,332

  • Concrete Pumping & Maintenance with 90% Recurring Client Base

    With a 90% recurring client base, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, over $10M in hard assets, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    PRICE $17,500,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

Professional: Financial/Office Services (12)

  • Leadership & Safety Training with 35% Profit Margin

    With over $2.2M in committed contracts already in place for 2021, this leadership & safety training company is already poised to increase their revenue by more than $1M! With a client base that consists of several manufacturing plants that have grown exponentially in the last year, the demand for safety training is through the roof. The company has a very healthy list of grants already approved, as well as a significant list of grants submitted and waiting for approval that will occupy much of 2021. There are also a large number of non-grant training and project initiatives that will positively impact future revenue. The owner will stay on for 2 years and carry 22.5% to prove a vested interest. Personnel includes the 2 owners, plus 4 certified trainers, 2 grant writers/managers, and 1 office coordinator; everyone on staff is cross-trained. Holding steady at a 95% customer retention rate, their services include leadership training, professional development, executive coaching, and safety training. 80% of their business is within a 150-mile radius, while the other 20% of their work is nationwide.

     

    Working out of a 3,600 sq. ft. office space at $2,950 per month and no inventory, the owners’ operating costs are extremely low. Assets include 5 vehicles used for training jobs that require travel, along with office furniture, fixtures, and equipment. The company’s typical sale size is $2,500-$4,500 per training session, depending on travel requirements. This company is the only private training organization that is partnered with public entities, giving them a huge strategic advantage in the grant world by allowing them to be able to utilize their platform and write more grant dollars than their competitors. Their grant writing managers work with businesses to identify training needs, write and submit the application, and manage grant training and fiscal responsibilities.

     

    Priced at $1,975,000, there is no slowdown in sight for this top notch company! Word-of-mouth referrals and 100% positive feedback from customers have given them a rock-solid reputation in the area. Working to promote e-learning, as well as looking into selling their training materials would certainly lead to revenue growth.

    PRICE $1,975,000 CASH FLOW $436,331

  • Executive Recruitment for Pharmaceuticals, Biotech, & Diagnostic Industries

    With a 5-year average profit margin of 50%, this executive recruitment firm has extremely low overhead; all employees work remotely! Established in 1996, this team of four has 70 years of combined industry experience; it includes the owner, who handles recruitment, business development, and financial oversight, along with 2 full-time recruiters and one part-time office administrator. Located in the greater Philadelphia region and well-established for nearly 25 years, this business has a solid reputation with nationwide clients.  They specialize in finding the perfect fit for life sciences industry clients, ranging from translational to commercial, and start-up to Fortune 500. Executive and professional level placements include Chief Officers, Vice Presidents, Executive Directors, Senior Managers, Senior Directors, Account Managers, and much more. This company also offers career coaching services for individuals looking to present themselves as the top candidate to employers – coaching includes resume presentation, mock interviews, and compensation negotiations.

     

    Using top-notch PCRecruiter Software, the company has the capability of pulling various reports, posting jobs, receiving candidate inquiries, and accessing their comprehensive database, all 100% remotely. This recruitment team consistently exceeds their clients’ expectations; 70% of their clients have been with them for over 14 years.

     

    Priced at $2,190,000, this company is in a prime position for growth. With proactive business development and an increase in recruiters, the business could boost their revenue tenfold. The need for recruitment of scientists has surged in recent months; pursuing this avenue would also lead to substantial growth.

    PRICE $2,190,000 CASH FLOW $523,215

  • B2B Health & Wellness Technology & Consulting

    With a proprietary technology platform, evaluation tools, algorithms, and historical database already in place, the mission of this company is to provide health & wellness program services for corporations and small to medium-sized businesses nationwide! A full range of products and solutions are offered to clients, including numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.

     

    Most clients have a one-year contract and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.

     

    Priced at $675,000, a 10% down payment of $67,500 returns $117,005 in the first year after debt payments – a 173% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!

    PRICE $675,000 CASH FLOW $207,101

  • Professional & Clerical Staffing Services in Rhode Island

    Well-established for over 17 years, this full-service staffing firm has several long-term client relationships in place! Providing staffing for temporary, temp-to-hire, and direct hire placements in the state of Rhode Island, clients include a variety of businesses and corporations, large and small. The team consists of 2 FT employees (the owner and 1 Staffing Specialist), as well as 1 on-call Staffing Coordinator and 55-60 temp employees on assignment as needed. Placements range from part-time, short-term positions to long-term opportunities. Several of their placements have remained in those positions for 10-15 years. Currently, they are receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis. Their placement process can take anywhere from 2 weeks to 2 months, depending on the needs of the client. Well-respected in their community and known for providing exceptional service and always being accessible to their clients, this staffing firm is in a prime position for growth under new ownership.

     

    Certified as a Rhode Island WBE/DBE, many national firms contact this company to partner with them; one such healthcare company was awarded a bid to set up a contact center in Rhode Island and develop the healthcare program for the state. Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments.

     

    Priced at $1,426,000 a 12.5% down payment of $178,250 returns $208,500 in the first year after debt payments – a 117% return on investment! This business already has a solid reputation in place and the majority of new business comes from word-of-mouth referrals. Creating an internet presence with a website and social media accounts would certainly expand the client base and increase revenue.

    PRICE $1,426,000 CASH FLOW $390,861

  • Fire Protection System Engineering Firm – 60% Profit Margin

    With year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations!  Established for over 25 years, this fire protection engineering firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The Senior Consultant has over 20 years of experience in the fire protection industry and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $4,775,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $4,775,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Occupational Healthcare Provider – 36% Profit Margin

    This double location occupational healthcare provider in Delaware has a 95% recurring client base! With a 36% profit margin in 2020, this company provides a variety of occupational services that includes workers compensation, immigration exams, CDL exams, travel medicine, physicals, drug screens, TB tests, and COVID-19 vaccinations. The current staff includes the owner and 11 others. The owner is a full-time M.D. who spends 80% of their time in direct patient care, 15% in administrative work, and 5% in occupational health evaluation and labs; they hold the following certifications: DE WC, DOT, Civil Surgeon, and MRO. The part-time staff includes a Nurse Practitioner, a Physician’s Assistant, a Billing Manager, 4 Medical Assistants, 2 Registered Nurses, and another Medical Doctor. This company also has a full-time Office Manager.

     

    The goal of this company is to provide occupational healthcare and travel medicine to the residents, businesses, and vacationers in Sussex County. They cherish the opportunity to assist employers in managing their most important asset: valued employees. They believe the quality of medical care employers provide their employees speaks louder than words. They maintain open lines of communications with employees, employers, case managers, and insurers with the single purpose of returning employees back to work as soon as medically possible.

     

    Priced at $595,000, a down payment of $59,500 returns $120,922 in the first year after debt payments which is a 203% return on investment! A new owner could grow the business by expanding services, implementing a marketing strategy, increasing staff and hours of operations, and capitalizing on the facilitation of vaccines.

    PRICE $595,000 CASH FLOW $204,109

  • Mobile & Wireless Solutions for Manufacturers, Logistics & Distribution

    With a 96% recurring client base, this value-added reseller (VAR) focuses on traditional bar code technology, RFID technology, process improvement, equipment sales and service and custom software solutions. This company has also developed a Warehouse Mgmt. system that could be sold for $45K or if further developed for $60K. From solution concept to the design, development and implementation, their experienced team can deliver traditional mobile and wireless solutions. 60% of their revenue comes from sales of products like data capture equipment, printing equipment and labels while the remaining 40% is from services like custom software and web development, hardware repair and network installation. Their typical network installation project runs from $80K - over $250K with this company installing as much as 1M square feet of networks for their clients and in any given year completing 10-15 projects. Their networking portfolio encompasses small businesses to Fortune 500 facilities across the country with an impeccable track record.

     

    Primarily working with manufacturers, wholesalers, logistics and distribution, this company has been helping their clients succeed for 15 years by providing custom tailored solutions and results as promised and on time. With over 20 years professional software and database development expertise in-house, their staff's strong coupling of technical and business knowledge allows them to provide clients with world class solutions to their needs. The team consists of 7 full time employees including a senior VP, office manager, software developers with decades of experience and a process improvement resource. They also have 2-3 part time technicians who work for them as needed.

     

    This company is proud to partner with some of the most successful and regarded companies in the IT industry like Zebra, Data Logic, Honeywell, and Epson to name a few.

    This company has an outstanding opportunity for growth through development and upgrade of their WMS as well as going after more network installation projects.

    PRICE $1,875,000 CASH FLOW $549,991

  • Nationwide Multi-Year Government Contracts for Full-Service Marketing & PR

    Established 1996 and with multi-year sub-contracts ranging from $60-$420K per year for three to five years, this award winning full-service public relations and marketing firm has been serving their clients statewide, nationally and internationally for 20+ years.  Average value of prime contracts is $1M for 5-6 years and majority of their clients are recurring with 10+ year average tenure. They have a total of 12 clients, with multiple being contracts with state and federal agencies. One of their main clients with 6 multi-year contracts is recognized nationwide and internationally for its leadership and innovation and in many ways is ten years ahead of other states because this company has more experience in next generation intelligent transportation systems than any other communications and training firms in the country. From their Southeast US 5,500 square feet office with $300K worth of assets that includes digital production equipment, the firm provides public relations, digital marketing & advertising, knowledge transfer, research & strategic services all under one roof. With a 25% profit margin, they primarily serve government agencies, but also have clients in construction, automotive, and emerging technologies. In addition, they have a robust marketing process that has culminated in 8000+ industry leaders and decisionmakers who receive company e-newsletters on a regular basis.

    The firm’s reputation is so strong in the transportation industry it is consistently sought out as a teaming partner by an impressive list of engineering, intelligent transportation, and planning firms Like HDR, Atkins and Booz & Allen. They win large, impressive contracts competing against strong incumbents due to their proprietary processes and scalable platforms for RFP responses, as well as strong business relationships.

    They have a team of 31 highly skilled fulltime employees that include a creative director who has won numerous awards for the branding, websites and marketing collateral he has developed for this company’s clients. In general, many employees have 10+ year tenure with the company and have professional backgrounds in journalism.

    With the results of the presidential election, the public relations industry is convinced that an infrastructure bill is imminent and this company is positioned to ride this wave of opportunity and grow because they have been leading outreach efforts for next generation intelligent transportation systems and connected vehicles for 15 years. In addition, they have more experience in these future focused specialties than any other communications and training firm in the nation.

    PRICE $4,200,000 CASH FLOW $990,945

  • Construction Management for Healthcare & Industrial Markets

    The owners of this Southeastern Pennsylvania Construction Management company will stay on board for 3-5 years! Well-established for over 40 years, they serve a diverse customer base covering an array of industries. Typically, they have healthcare projects running, with three individuals on staff who are certified healthcare constructors. They work within several general industrial markets, such as the food industry, with clients in snack food, dairy, and meat production, as well as industrial clients in various other production facilities. In addition to that core work, they serve general commercial business needs, including office and retail space.   They offer pre-construction services (site analysis/selection, project budget development, project planning & scheduling, land development coordination, etc.), along with complete construction management services, and post-occupancy follow-up and maintenance contracts, making sure each project is guided from beginning to end. Tracking approximately 400 projects per year, a large portion of their business is from repeat clients, generally over 60% annually, with some customers having 25-year tenure with the company.

     

    The company’s staff works out of a leased 26,000 sq. foot industrial building, which includes 18,500 sq. ft. of warehouse, storage, and woodshop area. Along with the 2 owners, who oversee daily operations, office management, and accounting, the team consists of 5 Project Managers and 17 full-time office staff, field employees, and carpenters. 18 trucks, 4 passenger vehicles, and a skid loader make up $760k in assets.

     

    Priced at $3,600,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Increasing advertising would capture more market share and would expand this company’s footprint far and wide. A 12.5% down payment of $450,000 returns $472,858 in the first year after debt payments – a 105% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,600,000 CASH FLOW $1,505,559

  • Wireless Tech Company with over $6M in Sales

    This business with over $6M in sales has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $7,930,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

  • Mid-Atlantic Architecture Firm with 80+ Employees

    With nearly $17M in sales in 2020, this multi-location architecture firm has a team of 80+ employees in place and the owners will stay on board for 2-10+ years! Established in 1973, the business has a 3-year average cash flow of $2.7M and a 16% average profit margin. Serving regionally in Pennsylvania, Delaware, New Jersey, and Maryland, the firm specializes in in architecture (75%), interior design (20%), and landscape architecture. The majority of their client base is in the private sector, with a significant portion of those being developers for individual corporate clients and higher education. Their highly skilled team of many long-tenured employees includes the 7 owners, 20 Registered Architects, 6 Senior Architectural Designers, 20 Intern Architects, 14 Interior Designers, 2 in Landscape Architecture, and 9 Operations Associates; all staff members serve firm-wide functions. The owners have identified five future leaders of the firm, as well as additional staff who they believe have the aptitude to grow into leadership roles in the future.

     

    The firm is known for providing top-notch architecture and design services in the area for 47 years.  Due to the diversity of the market sectors they serve, they fared exceptionally well in 2020 compared to some of their peers who are more specialized. Their 2020 revenue nearly matched 2019, and with the help of a PPP loan that was 100% forgiven, they were able to maintain their staff level with no reduced hours or furloughs.

    Priced at $11,640,000, there is immense growth potential through a smaller bolt-on acquisition, and a new owner could expand the market share in healthcare and senior living. The current owners want to establish an economically sustainable model for the purchase of shares from the three principals who will reach retirement age within the next 3 to 7 years. A sale could also provide the opportunity for enhanced growth.

    PRICE $11,640,000 CASH FLOW $2,720,030

  • Translating & Interpreting for Healthcare & Schools

    Priced at $510,000, a down payment of $51,000 returns $99,301 in the first year after debt payments – a 195% return on investment! Serving large health care, municipal legal, and school systems, along with commercial businesses, Social Security Administration, and individual customers, the seller of this LSP business is willing to do performance based earnout to show vested interest. Interpreting 50+ languages accounts for 85% of revenues, with translation of 150 languages accounting for the remaining 15%.  With 102 contracted employees, 75 of which are local interpreters, this business operates with low overhead, earning a 46% profit margin last year. 2020 numbers were down due to COVID-19, as 80% of their client base consists of schools and hospitals. There is complete confidence that the business will return to normal levels as establishments are re-opening. Established in 1997, many customers have been with this firm for over twenty years and have strong working relationships to draw upon. The owner remotely manages the day-to-day operations and routes the work to the team of translators. The translating duties could be distributed to a contracted employee, if desired. 

     

    Current administrative operations are completed remotely and both contracted coordinating assistants work part-time from their home.  The bank of 75 contracted interpreters are local and take assignments throughout Northeast Ohio and work in over fifty languages.  The team of 25 translators work in over 150 languages and are all remote hires. 

     

    This small but mighty team has grown their customer base and maintained a positive reputation in the area.  To build upon current successes, investment in marketing could be effective in generating new clients as could networking with local business owners. The company does not currently have a scheduling portal – a new owner who has a technology background and could implement this feature would be incredibly beneficial to the business.

    PRICE $510,000 CASH FLOW $177,567

B2B: Services/Wholesalers/Suppliers (21)

  • Commercial Roofing Company with 90 Employees

    With over $14.5M in sales and 90 W2 employees in place, the project size for this commercial roofing company ranges from $75k to $3.75M! Established for over 20 years and with 100% commercial clients, their focus is on larger industrial and institutional projects. Offering reroofing (50% of their revenue) new construction (40%) and repair & maintenance (10%) within a 75-mile radius of Pittsburgh, this team of 90 employees is comprised of 75 craftsmen and sheet metal workers, along with 15 salaried support staff. Boasting over $14M in sales in 2020, they self-perform 95% of their work, subbing out only as needed based on project size and ancillary services in the contract. Their clientele is a diverse assortment of consultants, general contractors, and private owners; this business is highly sought after in the greater Pittsburgh region.  They currently have 28 jobs that are in various stages of progress. With over $9M in assets, the bank loan is nearly 70% collateralized.

     

    The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-to-month basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The  non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction.

     

    Priced at $13,425,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Pursuing more maintenance work and roofing-related sheet metal projects would certainly increase revenue. With already long-standing client relationships in place, organic growth is inevitable if services are expanded.

    PRICE $13,425,000 CASH FLOW $3,057,717

  • Fire Protection System Engineering Firm – 60% Profit Margin

    With year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations!  Established for over 25 years, this fire protection engineering firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The Senior Consultant has over 20 years of experience in the fire protection industry and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $4,775,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $4,775,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Asbestos Abatement, Fireproofing, and Demolition Services

    With nearly $5M in sales in 2020, this environmental remediation business has been established in upstate New York since 2012! In addition to asbestos removal (60%), they also provide lead remediation, interior and structural demolition (20%), and spray-on fireproofing (20%).  Most business is accomplished in Upstate New York (85%), with the remaining work completed in the New York City area.  Customers include government organizations, state agencies, general contractors, construction managers, property managers, and property owners.  Project timelines are from a few weeks to a several months long and most contracts (85%) are earned through a request for proposal process.  Opportunities are plentiful for growth in the New York City Area as well as widening the service area to include New Jersey, Pennsylvania, or additional regions of New York.

     

    The company operates from a small office and warehouse space.  Purchasing and storing large amounts of equipment is not necessary as this business rents any large items needed to complete projects and houses very few assets on site.  All inventory and materials are ordered by project and may be briefly stored by this business or drop-shipped to the work site. 

     

    Nearly 95% of all work is completed in-house by a team of five to twenty-five floating laborers.  Rarely subcontractors are utilized for large projects or those at long distances.  Supporting this team are two supervisors, one accountant, and one team assistant.  Priced at $975,000, a 12.5% down payment returns $183,991 in the first year after debt payments – a 151% return on investment!

    PRICE $975,000 CASH FLOW $308,677

  • Cyber-Security, Cloud Computing, & IT Management Services

    Located in the Salt Lake Metro area, this IT management company had a 42% profit margin in 2020 and has over $11k in recurring monthly revenue! Along with providing network infrastructure services, this company also provides the necessary equipment and software their clients need: servers, storage, workstations, security software, virtualization software, etc. Services include firewall implementation & management, endpoint security, ransomware protection, data protection, disaster recovery, business continuity, instant virtualization, and proactive endpoint monitoring and management. The company utilizes specialized software, such as Datto RMM, Datto, BCDR, Autotask PSA, Auvik, Lionguard Scale Computing, DataCore, Windows, Citrix Apps, Citrix Hypervisor, Citrix ADC, and Sophos Central Endpoint. The company boasts high profit margins and has seen year-over-year growth in sales since 2018.

     

    The owner handles the day-to-day operations, while the two part-time 1099 employees assist with technology health checks, running weekly & monthly reports for clients, adding content to the website, and helping with quotes. The business is run from a home office or on site at client locations; no commercial office space is needed.

     

    Priced at $685,000, a 10% down payment of $68,500 returns $115,540 in the first year after debt payments – a 169% return on investment! With a solid customer base intact and an abundance of documentation on each client, a transition would be seamless for an already existing IT management company that is looking to grow the own client list and revenue.

    PRICE $685,000 CASH FLOW $203,872

  • Managed IT Services, Web Services, and IT Solutions - $13M in Sales

    With over 450 clients and $200k in recurring monthly revenue, this IT management company has been established in the Twin Cities area for nearly 30 years! Serving clients locally (75%), regionally (10%), and nationwide (15%), this business offers a variety of technology services & products. Services include technology lifecycle management, IT staffing, cloud solutions, data storage, data security & remote access, and web services; they also provide new & re-certified equipment from leading manufacturers, as well as sales, repair, maintenance, and installation of windows desktops and servers. A highly-skilled team of 39 employees consists of 6 in Operations, 4 in Admin, 10 in sales, and 19 in the service department. They cater to each customer’s specific needs for their company and implement customized IT solutions and services. Clients are in a variety of industries such as education, financial, healthcare, insurance, and manufacturing; of their 450+ clients, 288 of them purchase $1k or more per year, 122 of them purchase $10k or more, and 24 purchase $100k or more annually. 2021 is on track to be a record year for this business, as the remote workforce is now entrenched in the workplace – this business will see double digit growth for the foreseeable future. 

     

    Based out of an 18k sq. ft. building, 9,000 sq. ft. is used for warehouse/production space, while 4,500 sq. ft. is office space; the remainder is rented by tenants. Assets include $161k of equipment – PC’s, notebooks, servers, SAN’s, network gear, warehouse equipment, and office furniture & fixtures. The current owner handles HR, Finance, AP, AR, policies & procedures, and contracts, and is willing to stay on board for 1-5 years to help grow the company.

     

    Priced at $2,200,000, this business already has a strong recurring client base, word-of-mouth referrals, and an extremely well-established name in the industry and the region. Marketing is the key to organizational growth; better SEO, email campaigns, lunch & learns, etc. would generate more client interest and boost revenue.


    PRICE $2,200,000 CASH FLOW $683,042

  • B2B Health & Wellness Technology & Consulting

    With a proprietary technology platform, evaluation tools, algorithms, and historical database already in place, the mission of this company is to provide health & wellness program services for corporations and small to medium-sized businesses nationwide! A full range of products and solutions are offered to clients, including numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.

     

    Most clients have a one-year contract and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.

     

    Priced at $675,000, a 10% down payment of $67,500 returns $117,005 in the first year after debt payments – a 173% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!

    PRICE $675,000 CASH FLOW $207,101

  • Professional & Clerical Staffing Services in Rhode Island

    Well-established for over 17 years, this full-service staffing firm has several long-term client relationships in place! Providing staffing for temporary, temp-to-hire, and direct hire placements in the state of Rhode Island, clients include a variety of businesses and corporations, large and small. The team consists of 2 FT employees (the owner and 1 Staffing Specialist), as well as 1 on-call Staffing Coordinator and 55-60 temp employees on assignment as needed. Placements range from part-time, short-term positions to long-term opportunities. Several of their placements have remained in those positions for 10-15 years. Currently, they are receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis. Their placement process can take anywhere from 2 weeks to 2 months, depending on the needs of the client. Well-respected in their community and known for providing exceptional service and always being accessible to their clients, this staffing firm is in a prime position for growth under new ownership.

     

    Certified as a Rhode Island WBE/DBE, many national firms contact this company to partner with them; one such healthcare company was awarded a bid to set up a contact center in Rhode Island and develop the healthcare program for the state. Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments.

     

    Priced at $1,426,000 a 12.5% down payment of $178,250 returns $208,500 in the first year after debt payments – a 117% return on investment! This business already has a solid reputation in place and the majority of new business comes from word-of-mouth referrals. Creating an internet presence with a website and social media accounts would certainly expand the client base and increase revenue.

    PRICE $1,426,000 CASH FLOW $390,861

  • Commercial Roofing Services – over $13.5M in Sales

    With over $13.5M in sales in 2020, this roofing & sheet metal company has over 70 employees in place! Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. With expertise in membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work, this business has considerable repeat business with general contractors, construction managers, and owners in the area. Their diversified client base includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,525,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,525,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • 60% Collateralized - Maui AC and Refrigeration Service and Installation

    With $1.5M in assets and $2M in their pipeline, this leading air conditioning and refrigeration company has been serving the island of Maui for more than 23 years! The businesses sees an even split between service and installation; 75% of their maintenance and repair clients are recurring while about 50% of their installation clients are recurring. This company provides their AC, refrigeration, and sheet metal services to even the farthest areas of the Maui island and their average monthly revenue is $400k. Their service projects range from $200 to $50k while installations range from $30k- $500k. There are 16 employees on staff including service and installation managers, technicians, a sheet metal expert, assistants, and a bookkeeper. They are known as the #1 refrigeration and air-conditioning company on Maui because of their excellent customer service and prompt quality repairs.

    The owner has built a solid customer base and provides services to commercial clients like condos, shopping malls, retail stores some of which have relationships with this company spanning 20+ years. Operations are managed from a large 6,000 square feet location in the Kahului area. The office has 2,000 square feet of space and the remaining 4,000 square feet is dedicated to their warehouse and sheet metal shop. The owner currently focuses on general financial and business oversight as well as the bidding process.

    Priced at $2,450,000, there is tremendous growth potential for a new owner. The company does no marketing; the only advertising they do is from their website and ads on their trucks. Over the years, all of their business has come from word of mouth due to the excellent service they provide. Implementing a marketing strategy would certainly boost sales.

    PRICE $2,450,000 CASH FLOW $528,666

  • Environmental Consulting Services with $2.7M in Backlog

    With $2.7M in backlog, this environmental and engineering service provider has been serving developers, engineers, manufacturers, and municipalities since 1985! A highly trained team of 41 employees are in place, including 9 managers. Split into service groups, their qualified personnel are trained and certified as environmental professionals, mold inspectors, asbestos inspectors, asbestos management planners, professional geologists, brownfield redevelopment specialists, professional wetland scientists, underground storage tank professionals, remediation specialists, hazardous materials managers, and regulatory compliance managers. The owner/president would stay on for 1 year to aid in the transition, but for the right fit, would continue in sales/mediation for up to 10 years.

     

    Completing aver 12,000 projects in 28 states, mostly east of the Mississippi, this company has also done work in Mexico, Canada, and Eastern Europe. A continued area of growth is to expand the service concentration outside Michigan. Their work in process is nearly $840k, with a strong stream of work coming in.

     

    This company’s corporate headquarters is located in Brighton, Michigan. But there are additional offices located in Grand Rapids, Detroit, and Trenton. They even currently have a missionary office in Lexington, Kentucky out of a staff person’s home. At the purchase price of $3,195,000, a 12.5% down payment of $399,375 returns $389,992 in the first year after debt payments. That is a 97% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,195,000 CASH FLOW $879,305

  • Scaffolding Equipment Rental Company – over $13M in Assets

    With a three-year average cash flow of $5,457,808, this company offers top-of-the-line scaffolding equipment to a diverse customer base of 500 customers in the Twin Cities metro area! They currently have 15 recurring clients that include general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair and installation contractors. They install, dismantle, rent, and sell frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms with 59% of their revenue coming from rentals. With only $1M in capex, this business has over $13M in assets and over $3.5M in work-in-progress and backlog. They are on average 70% utilized with about $9.9M in inventory out for rentals on a monthly basis. With $3.9M in hydro mobile inventory (70 – 75 units) they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 1-3 units of a competing brand. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market.

     

    This company does little to no marketing or advertising because they have recurring clients due to their top-notch customer service, delivery options and the quality of indoor and outdoor scaffolding. This business has a sister company (23% of revenue) that is Union based. Their current building space is 50,000 square feet with 3,000 square feet being the office building and 47,000 square feet of warehouse. There is also 1.2 acres yard for outside storage. 

     

    In any given month, they have around 150 work orders and their large projects that go for longer than on year are greater than $1M in value. Assets include almost $11M in scaffolding inventory and $1.6M in vehicles like trucks (5), 27-foot straight trucks, one-ton truck (1), pickups (20). Their current backlog of projects is about $3.5M and they are over $13M sales for 2020. At any given time, they have anywhere from 45 – 60 employees with 21 of them being office workers like sales representatives, office managers and the rest being laborers and contractors.

     

    Two of the owners focus primarily on sales and the third owner manages day to day business but they are currently transitioning responsibilities to other employees. Priced at $22,950,000, this is a business that is positioned to grow in the scaffolding space through acquisition of more inventory and expansion into different cities.

    PRICE $22,950,000 CASH FLOW $5,457,808

  • Solar Panel Install Since 1977

    This Southeast Iowa company has been well-known throughout the Midwest region since 1977! Specializing in solar installation, sign installation, and electrical construction for farmers, commercial & residential clients, and the industrial sector, the business has $3M worth of secured work to take them through the rest of 2020 and into 2021. The exceptionally highly skilled team includes 2 owners, one of which is an Electrical Engineer – the other is a Master Electrician and superintendent, along with a CFO, 1 accountant, 4 solar crew leaders, 6 electrical crew leaders, 2 sign installers, 1 FT mechanic, 2 assistant project managers, 2 solar sales reps, and 15-20 electrical apprentices to assist as needed. Their facilities are comprised of a 2,000 sq. ft. office/crew space, a 2,400 sq. ft. mechanic shop, 9,000 sq. ft. trailer parking space, and a combined total of 34,200 sq. ft. in equipment/material storage and truck parking.

     

    The business has a considerable amount of assets, including several cube vans, trucks, trailers, generators, electric benders, welders, trenchers, backhoes, and an extensive amount of other equipment and tools.  They use Foundation, which is a construction specific software designed for remote use, as well as PVsyst and Helioscope for solar design, and ConEst for estimating services.

     

    With a solid team and an outstanding reputation in place, this company’s services are sought out by solar developers in the region. Substantial growth opportunities are on the horizon, as important strategic partnerships are developing, and the solar industry is soaring.

    PRICE $6,600,000 CASH FLOW $1,345,934

  • Railroad Terminal Logistics – Absentee Owner

     

    This rail freight and bulk transfer logistics business has 4 locations in Pennsylvania & New York supporting a very diversified customer & industry base!  This business has a 32% profit margin, over $2M in assets, and been deemed an essential business during COVID. Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. Everyone on the team of 36 highly experienced staff is cross-trained and can work at each separate entity within this company. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers. The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

    Substantial growth is inevitable for this family of companies. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services would be tremendous and diversified.

     

    PRICE $7,750,000 CASH FLOW $1,428,816

  • Industrial Cleaning and Maintenance — 90% Collateralized

    This oil field service company specializes in turnaround and industrial cleaning services for oil, gas and utility companies and is 90% collateralized! Handling all aspects for the disposal of drilling waste in the oil and gas sector, this company currently has 250 clients with 50 of those recurring. 70% of their revenue comes from turnaround and industrial cleaning services; the other 30% is a mixture of maintenance, water delivery, vegetation control, water truck services, mobile steaming and equipment rentals. Personnel includes 1 Regional Manager, 1 Dispatcher, 1 Safety Officer, 1 Mechanic, 2 Junior Mechanics, 1 Shop Hand/Assistant, and 15-22 Operators/Assistants. The 2 owners work remotely doing general business oversight and accounting & payroll management. Their vast array of high-quality equipment is comprised of hydro vacs, combo vacs, tank trucks, straight vacs, water trucks, mobile steamers, pressure trucks, and maintenance units. The business is COR Certified, Comply Works Certified, and belongs to ISNetworld.

    The company’s leased space consists of an 11-acre industrial fully fenced yard site, a 750 sq. ft. office with 4 maintenance bays, and a 5-bedroom crew house.

    Promoting their one-stop-shop service, hiring a salesperson, increasing truck utilization, and expanding into neighboring communities would undoubtedly grow the business and increase revenue.

    Some key information:

    • Tremendous signage, word-of-mouth referrals, and a rock-solid reputation gives this company a firm grasp on the area.
    • 70% of the company’s revenue comes from turnaround and industrial cleaning services.
    • This company currently has 250 clients with 50 of those recurring.
    At the purchase price of $2,875,000 CAD, this business is 90% collateralized.

    PRICE $2,875,000 CASH FLOW $1,002,929

  • Leadership & Safety Training with 35% Profit Margin

    With over $2.2M in committed contracts already in place for 2021, this leadership & safety training company is already poised to increase their revenue by more than $1M! With a client base that consists of several manufacturing plants that have grown exponentially in the last year, the demand for safety training is through the roof. The company has a very healthy list of grants already approved, as well as a significant list of grants submitted and waiting for approval that will occupy much of 2021. There are also a large number of non-grant training and project initiatives that will positively impact future revenue. The owner will stay on for 2 years and carry 22.5% to prove a vested interest. Personnel includes the 2 owners, plus 4 certified trainers, 2 grant writers/managers, and 1 office coordinator; everyone on staff is cross-trained. Holding steady at a 95% customer retention rate, their services include leadership training, professional development, executive coaching, and safety training. 80% of their business is within a 150-mile radius, while the other 20% of their work is nationwide.

     

    Working out of a 3,600 sq. ft. office space at $2,950 per month and no inventory, the owners’ operating costs are extremely low. Assets include 5 vehicles used for training jobs that require travel, along with office furniture, fixtures, and equipment. The company’s typical sale size is $2,500-$4,500 per training session, depending on travel requirements. This company is the only private training organization that is partnered with public entities, giving them a huge strategic advantage in the grant world by allowing them to be able to utilize their platform and write more grant dollars than their competitors. Their grant writing managers work with businesses to identify training needs, write and submit the application, and manage grant training and fiscal responsibilities.

     

    Priced at $1,975,000, there is no slowdown in sight for this top notch company! Word-of-mouth referrals and 100% positive feedback from customers have given them a rock-solid reputation in the area. Working to promote e-learning, as well as looking into selling their training materials would certainly lead to revenue growth.

    PRICE $1,975,000 CASH FLOW $436,331

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Mid-Atlantic Architecture Firm with 80+ Employees

    With nearly $17M in sales in 2020, this multi-location architecture firm has a team of 80+ employees in place and the owners will stay on board for 2-10+ years! Established in 1973, the business has a 3-year average cash flow of $2.7M and a 16% average profit margin. Serving regionally in Pennsylvania, Delaware, New Jersey, and Maryland, the firm specializes in in architecture (75%), interior design (20%), and landscape architecture. The majority of their client base is in the private sector, with a significant portion of those being developers for individual corporate clients and higher education. Their highly skilled team of many long-tenured employees includes the 7 owners, 20 Registered Architects, 6 Senior Architectural Designers, 20 Intern Architects, 14 Interior Designers, 2 in Landscape Architecture, and 9 Operations Associates; all staff members serve firm-wide functions. The owners have identified five future leaders of the firm, as well as additional staff who they believe have the aptitude to grow into leadership roles in the future.

     

    The firm is known for providing top-notch architecture and design services in the area for 47 years.  Due to the diversity of the market sectors they serve, they fared exceptionally well in 2020 compared to some of their peers who are more specialized. Their 2020 revenue nearly matched 2019, and with the help of a PPP loan that was 100% forgiven, they were able to maintain their staff level with no reduced hours or furloughs.

    Priced at $11,640,000, there is immense growth potential through a smaller bolt-on acquisition, and a new owner could expand the market share in healthcare and senior living. The current owners want to establish an economically sustainable model for the purchase of shares from the three principals who will reach retirement age within the next 3 to 7 years. A sale could also provide the opportunity for enhanced growth.

    PRICE $11,640,000 CASH FLOW $2,720,030

  • Manufacturing & Installation of Custom-Fitted Furniture

    Priced at $710,000, a down payment of $71,000 returns $114,565 in the first year after debt payments – a 161% return on investment! With an extremely diverse client base consisting of both residential and commercial customers, this company specializes in custom fitted furniture for schools, healthcare facilities, churches, and corporate offices, as well as residents in the Twin Cities region. There is a well-trained team of 10 already in place that includes designers, sales representatives, and accounting staff, as well as employees who focus on production, assembly, delivery, and installation.  Their mission is to provide the client with individually designed, high quality furniture solutions at a fraction of the cost of custom-made furniture. This dynamic company utilizes in-house engineering and manufacturing as well as outside resources to create beautiful solutions that fit any space perfectly, maximizing storage and functionality. The team successfully altered their process 2020 to include virtual design consultations and they are following all necessary protocols for in-home meetings, deliveries, and installations.

     

    The modular furniture system includes components for offices, storage spaces, bedrooms, home entertainment areas, wall beds, closets, and garages.  The owners focus on managing the daily operations including design, sales, ordering, production, marketing, and financial oversight.

     

    Operations are managed from their conveniently located headquarters with ample space for the showroom, offices, and work area for manufacturing and assembly.  Continued growth can be found through increased marketing and networking to residential clients who are working from home. With work already in the pipeline and a flexible transition period, this business is ready for the next owner to step in for continued growth and success.    

    PRICE $710,000 CASH FLOW $206,120

  • Electric & Security Automation Subcontractors with over $10M in Sales

    This business one of the largest electric and security automation subcontractors in the region, boasting over $10M in sales and a diverse client base comprised of schools, airports, casinos, distribution centers, municipalities, manufacturers, and venues!  65% of their revenue is new installs in existing buildings – which turn into maintenance revenue, which accounts for 35% of sales. With over 50 current employees, the owner of this business is willing to remain part of the team for 1-2 years.

    These specialty contractors focus on specialized electrical and low voltage work including automation, security, infrastructure, and industrial projects. Seven of the over fifty employees focus on administrative tasks, while the rest are union employees who work on-site.  The well-rounded crews include project managers as well as supervising managers.  The owners currently focus on estimations, project management and business oversight and are not in the field.  Projects often include large-scale security system installation, industrial machine installation and maintenance, complete electrical installation, data center electrical work, and the installation of building automation with related controls.  They focus on data/security and automation. 

    The $753,000 in assets includes Shop tools, furniture, fixtures, electric benders, tugger, high voltage tester, 2014 John Deer tractor, off road ATV, conduit bender a track loader, 9 Ford trucks, 6 Chevy Trucks, 2 trailers, 1 load haul and 1 GMC truck.

    Priced at $6,315,000, the company has shown exceptional growth over the years and the transition to electrical focused services has benefited this company.  A continued dedication to automation, data centers, and security could generate future growth. Return on investment in the first year after debt payments is 108%.

    PRICE $6,315,000 CASH FLOW $1,697,195

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • Media & Marketing Agency in Bulgaria - 29% Profit Margin

    This Firm has 64 employees (38 FT and 26 PT) making it turnkey and set up for an incoming buyer to take over. Silicon Valley of Eastern Europe – Sofia, Bulgaria.  The owner is willing to remain as the general manager for 3+ years! They boast a very diverse client base, with 30% being local and regional, and 70% being international clients.

    This top internationally recognized media management and marketing agency earns $2MM (BGN) in gross revenue and $784,000 (BGN) in cash flow.  The highly regarded team provides top to bottom media communications services including advising, training and education, graphic design, as well as crisis management.  The Seller, currently operating in an oversight capacity, is also willing to remain on as GM (if desired) for 3 years post-sale. This would ensure a smooth transition for not only clients but staff as well.  

    Completing over 5,000 projects in the past two decades, strategic creativity abounds amongst this team of seventy-four.  Specialists in crisis management, public affairs, and public relations work directly with clients to manage their brand through multi-faceted communication channels including social media sites, web site development, television, public appearances, media interaction, and radio.  This well-trained and educated team run day-to-day operations effectively while the owner is meeting with clients both in and out of the country and no billable hours.  Though a new owner would not need to travel, the team frequently travels locally, regionally, and internationally. 

    Fully equipped with beautiful furniture and fixtures, as well as cutting edge professional tools, the building is owned by the seller and is available for continued lease.

     

     

    PRICE $1,400,000 CASH FLOW $784,000

Private Equity Group (35)

  • Concrete Pumping & Maintenance with 90% Recurring Client Base

    With a 90% recurring client base, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, over $10M in hard assets, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    PRICE $17,500,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • HVAC, Electrical, Security & Traffic Signals – 80% Recurring Clients

    This multi-service business has an incredibly versatile team of employees in place – 90% of their work is self-performed!  With an 80% recurring client base, this company has an average WIP worth $2M. They offer complete mechanical, electrical, and automation design, installation, and maintenance, as well as steel erection, concrete foundations, design build, and heavy equipment installation. The team of employees is incredibly versatile, with the ability to transition from trade to trade very easily. Less than 20% of business is new construction and they have 25+ recurring clients that span different industries. They have existing government contracts with the city and department of transportation.  The company started performing more mechanical services a few years ago, resulting in higher net income and profit margins. As they continue to do more on the mechanical side in the coming years, a new owner can expect to see profit margins and net income continue to increase, as profit margins from mechanical work is 35%, compared to 15% from general contracting services.

     

    Located near Charleston, South Carolina, the company operates from a two-acre property including four buildings. They are well-known all over the Carolinas. Work is typically steady throughout the year and most projects are completed within a 100-mile radius of the office.

     

    Priced at $6,050,000, this is a business that is in a position to grow in the construction industry. There is tremendous room for expansion into the mechanical side, which currently accounts for only 9% of the business, but has a higher profit margin than the other services they provide.  

    PRICE $6,050,000 CASH FLOW $1,472,747

  • Industrial Painting & Site Prep with 90+ Employees

    With over 90 employees and nearly $2.8M in assets, this business has an 80% recurring client base!  Located in Ohio and New York, this company specializes in painting large infrastructure projects as well as any site preparation associated with a job.  Assets include $2.1M worth of painting supplies, safety equipment, rigging, and tools, and $680k in trucks and trailers; all equipment is in place for continued success.  The team of union foremen and painters work primarily for general contractors and maximize their awarded contracts through competitive bidding and strong professional relationships. 

     

    Service area is 90% in the state of New York and 10% in Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Ohio. Operations are managed from the Ohio office and supplies are stored in a New York area warehouse.  There are additional field offices for each large project where location-based staff report daily. 

     

    Clients are 80% recurring and consist of general contractors working on infrastructure & municipal projects. They have a highly skilled team of 92 people: 6 administrative staff, 3 project managers, 8 foremen, and 75 painters. Providing industrial painting and site preparation for bridges, tunnels, and transit stations, this company also does lead abatement and shield installation in the winter months when painting is not an option. The team completes approximately 40 projects per year – average projects run in the $500k-$1M range.

     

    Increasing capital to increase bonding capacity would certainly lead to growth in revenue, as well as expanding services to include outdoor painting of private buildings.

     

    Both owners currently work within the business.  The majority owner focuses on financial oversight and business management and is willing to remain on staff through transition and beyond. The other owner is the lead estimator and oversees field operations, and he is willing to stay on with the company for several years after closing, as desired.

    PRICE $18,750,000 CASH FLOW $4,437,549

  • HVAC & Plumbing in Northern California with 70 Employees

    This HVAC and plumbing company in Northern California has seen year-over-year sales growth since 2017 with nearly $13M in sales in 2020!  Serving the Sacramento area since 2003, they complete HVAC (70%) and plumbing services (30%). With an on-site fully automated sheet metal fabrication shop, the company is capable of manufacturing ductwork up to 14 gauge, plumbing and piping, as well as architectural sheet metal and flashings. There are 70 employees on staff, including controllers, foremen, project managers, assistants, and a field/shop work force.  The owner has built a solid customer base with a focus on serving schools, government institutions, and commercial office buildings, and many customers have been with this company for over fifteen years.  The owner currently focuses on lead generation, some estimations, bonding, and general oversight of the business.

     

    Operations are managed from a large 14,000 square foot location in the Sacramento Valley area.  The office has 2,000 square feet of space with a reception area, private offices, and staff spaces.  The remaining 12,000 square feet is dedicated to warehouse, storage, and the fabrication shop. 

     

    Priced at $6,900,000, there is huge potential for continued growth and success. The industry in Northern California always has room for expansion and the company could take on additional available work in the region.  Another area for development could be found in adding a service department and considering the implementation of maintenance and inspection contracts.

    PRICE $6,900,000 CASH FLOW $1,915,783

  • Large Electrical Contractor in SW States with Immensely Growing Populations

    Boasting nearly $41.5M in sales in 2020 this electrical contracting company has over 400 full-time W2 employees with five offices throughout the American Southwest! Headquartered in Phoenix in an office/warehouse that holds $1M worth of inventory, the company also has offices in Tucson, Prescott, El Paso, and  Albuquerque. As the populations in those areas are booming, the demand for this company’s services is through the roof, with no end in sight. They currently wire around 200 homes per week, which comes out to about 10k wiring jobs per year. Their client base primarily consists of big builders in Arizona and smaller builders in New Mexico and Texas, with 10 of the big builders accounting for 80% of revenue. Work is secured years into the future, as builders may purchase land and develop it for 500-1,000 homes; those homes may take 7-10 years to be completed.

     

    In addition to a large variety of electrical services, the company also provides backhoe services for trenching used for direct-burial cables. Assets include 5 backhoes, around 350 trucks, and 2 long-haul tractor-trailers. Their inventory is concentrated in the Phoenix warehouse. As jobs are given the go-ahead, the necessary components are packed up and transported to the correct city office, where they are picked up by a field employee and taken to the job site.

     

    Priced at $23,550,000 growth potential is tremendous for a new owner. Builders are frequently requesting this company to work in other cities and states due to a massive influx of new residents (Texas and Arizona combined gained 800,000 residents in 2018-19 while Colorado and Oklahoma gained 350,000).* Expanding into these areas undergoing significant population growth would certainly increase revenue for years to come. The solid reputation and strong team are already in place – a new owner could take this company to the next level.

     

    *Data taken from US Census Bureau—State-to-State Migration Flows: 2019

    PRICE $23,550,000 CASH FLOW $4,120,948

  • Turnkey Solar Solutions with $2M in Secured Work

    With over 400 current clients in Iowa, Illinois, and Wisconsin, this turnkey solar solutions company has $2M in secured work! Providing solar integration for residential & commercial clients, the business is well-established in the region. Based out of a 4,000 sq. ft. space in Dubuque, the team has an experienced Master Electrician and Project Manager already in place; install and electrical work is subcontracted out as needed. With over 400 installs since the company’s inception and a pipeline of $15-17M, warranties have expired, which could certainly lead to service contracts being offered and a boost in revenue. They offer a variety of services including design, procurement, construction, project financing, quality assurance, and consulting. The 2 owners currently share operations and development roles. The range in price for residential customers (50% of their client base) is $17-$25k. On the commercial side, it can range from $20k-$2M, depending on the size and scope of the project. There is a well-established reputation with some large-name commercial clients in the region, with long-standing relationships ranging from 2-7 years. The company uses top-notch Helioscope software for project design and industry-leading Energy Toolbase software for proposals.

     

    Assets include a 2021 Chevy 2500, a 2015 Ford F150, a 2015 Chevy 1500, and a work van, totaling more than $80,000 in value. There are substantial growth opportunities for a new owner. As electrification is increasing throughout the country, customers looking to take advantage of the tax incentives and economic benefits of solar integration will only increase. Expanding the client base in the commercial and industrial space would lead to tremendous growth.

     

    Priced at $3,300,000, a 12.5% down payment of $412,500 returns $409,177 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 99% return on investment.

    PRICE $3,300,000 CASH FLOW $831,191

  • Amazon E-Commerce Dropship Vendor w/ $1.2M Cashflow

    This dropship vendor provides necessary janitorial, PPE, and office supplies through Amazon and other marketplaces! Using Channel Advisor software, which can manage up to 1 million SKUs, this business manages over 400,000 products with 20+ vendors, and resells on their website and marketplaces. They currently do no marketing or advertising.

    Every order placed online is drop-shipped directly from the wholesaler or manufacturer in 2-3 business days to the consumer/business – they carry little to no inventory and have almost no overhead. With an integrated ordering system already in place, their software is ideal for the high volume of products this company sells.

    • They continue to add 2-3 vendors per year, each providing a greater variety of products.  Recently, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices.
    • 95% of revenue comes from large name marketplace retailers, while 5% comes directly from the website.
    • 75% of website sales come from the consumer and 25% from business accounts.
    • Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability.
    • Providing quality products at a low price, the product mark-up is between 28-48%. Excellent relationships with the wholesalers help them deliver their low-price guarantee, as well as superb customer service.
    •  A small storage facility in the Southeast, US is currently used to handle returns to the wholesalers.
    This company priced at $3,025,000 is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. Securing additional contracts directly with hospitals and corporations would also boost sales.

    PRICE $3,025,000 CASH FLOW $1,151,411

  • Erosion & Shoreline Control, Site Prep for Civil & Industrial

    This heavy civil construction business has 97 full-time employees in place and over 20 active projects at one time! Their sale size ranges from $10k to $5M, and they have averaged over 225 jobs per year for the last 3 years. Already on their 70th job of 2021 and $11M in backlog, work is plentiful for this Texas company. They offer a vast array of heavy civil construction services, including  building streets, subdivisions, commercial site preparation, and industrial work at petrochemical plants, as well as utility system construction, earthwork, site preparation, coastal erosion control, shoreline protection, and general maintenance. Clients are comprised of private developers, industrial, city, county, and state governments, and GC’s. This versatile offering of services and diverse client base works in this company’s favor, as they don’t rely heavily on one client or sector. Approximately 65% of their work is as the GC, primarily for the county, city, or state. The other 35% involves working for the GC on a project as the sub. While they do have a go-to list of subcontractors when needed, the majority of the time, it’s their own team doing the work.

     

    The team works out of a 6,000 sq. ft. office building located on 5 acres of land; their facilities also include 1 heavy equipment shop, 1 truck shop (2,000 sq. ft. each), and 1 fuel & oil shed (1,200 sq. ft.). The owner of the business owns the facility under a separate entity and leases it back to the business for $9,000/month. With a solid reputation in the area, the business has long-standing relationships with customers and GC’s alike; they are able to keep their service area within a 100-mile radius of the office. 

     

    Utilizing top notch ComputerEase, HCSS, AGTEK, and Trimble software, this well-respected team receives invites to bid from GC’s they’ve worked with over the years; they also subscribe to websites that send notices of upcoming projects that are up for public bidding, with a 20-25% success rate. Priced at $20,250,000, there is ample opportunity for growth. Expanding the service area, actively pursuing more bids, or opening a satellite office in an area nearby where the population is booming would certainly lead to an increase in revenue.

    PRICE $20,250,000 CASH FLOW $4,316,388

  • Contract Manufacturer of Corporate & Collegiate Headwear, Bags, & Apparel

    With nearly $60M in sales in 2020, this contract manufacturing company has a full management staff already in place! Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production/manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already established, they have been able to solidify themselves in the market, acting as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors.

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days.

    Priced at $15,900,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $15,900,000 CASH FLOW $4,161,997

  • Fire Protection System Engineering Firm – 60% Profit Margin

    With year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years, this Dallas company has a highly skilled team of employees already in place who run the day-to-day operations!  Established for over 25 years, this fire protection engineering firm provides a wide array of services in all phases of fire protection engineering, including building & fire code consulting & engineering, fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler systems, smoke exhaust systems, fire modeling, plan review, and systems testing. Their diverse client base consists of design professionals (55%), contractors (25%), federal government (10%), and private owners (10%), with their service area covering primarily Texas and surrounding states. The collaborative team of 7 includes the owner, a licensed Fire Protection Engineer, along with 1 Senior Consultant, 1 Senior Designer, 3 Engineers, and 1 Administrative Assistant. The Senior Consultant has over 20 years of experience in the fire protection industry and would be able to assume the role of CEO under new ownership. The team is based out of 2,300 sq. ft. office in Dallas, with a small 200 sq. ft. satellite office in San Antonio.

     

    Plan review customers are a portion of their ongoing client base; plan review services provide recurring monthly revenue, as it is a service in constant demand and yields steady cash flow for the company, accounting for approximately 20% of their total revenue per year. The average plan review fee ranges from $500-$1,000. Project sale sizes range anywhere from $2k-$200k, with an average sale size of around $10k. The firm uses state-of-the-art software packages such as AutoCAD, Revit, HydraCAD, AutoSPRINK, CFAST, FDS, Egress, and Intelligibility.

     

    Priced at $4,775,000, this firm has seen year-over-year growth in sales for 3 years and a 5-year average profit margin of 47%. A solid team is already in place; they run the day-to-day operations, handle clients regularly, and complete projects successfully. Over the years, this firm has gained a  reputation for providing some of the best services when it comes to fire protection and planning, giving them steady word-of-mouth referrals. Pursuing more projects in colleges & universities, school districts, and in the industrial sector would certainly lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $4,775,000 CASH FLOW $1,239,860

  • Commercial Roofing Services – over $13.5M in Sales

    With over $13.5M in sales in 2020, this roofing & sheet metal company has over 70 employees in place! Specializing in commercial roofing in the western half of Connecticut, the lower Hudson Valley, and the five boroughs of NYC and Long Island, they install new roofing as well as replace existing roofs. The breakdown varies from year to year; in 2020, 75% of sales came from new construction, while 25% was reroofing services. With expertise in membrane roofing, metal roofing, custom sheet metal work, shingle, slate, and tile steep slope roofing, below grade waterproofing, plaza pavers, and ornamental sheet metal work, this business has considerable repeat business with general contractors, construction managers, and owners in the area. Their diversified client base includes national retail, hospitals, pharmaceuticals, military, universities, private schools, government (schools, town halls, police, fire, etc.), and NYC government agencies. The team of 70 includes the owner, who handles sales, banking, insurance, and bonding, as well as a Director of Operations, Director of Business Development, Chief Estimator, HR Manager, Accounting Manager, Field Manager, Project Manager, and 60 full-time field employees.

     

    The roofing & sheet metal division is 100% union; they started a solar division in 2020, which is 100% non-union. The business landed a national account servicing approximately 200 stores, strip malls, and shopping centers from Buffalo, New York to Baltimore, Maryland. The solar division was started to be more competitive for this account. Although they have not completed any solar installations, this division has taken on service work since June 2020 and did $500k in sales with a profit of nearly $225k. The national account has approximately 20M sq. ft. of roof; the non-union solar division will provide reroofing services for 10-12% of their stores. They expect to do 2-3 times the 2020 sales amount in 2021 with similar margins. The solar division recently landed a $2.7M private job that the roofing division will profit $1.2M from – this is in addition to all the national chain retail work that will be profitable.

     

    Priced at $6,525,000, this company is poised for large growth. Expanding the solar division will boost sales and increase profit margins tremendously. They grew by 20%+ in 2020, with the expectation to be at that same rate or higher in 2021. A new owner could take their well-trained workforce and established relationships with private customers to the next level. 

    PRICE $6,525,000 CASH FLOW $1,517,716

  • Structural & Offsite Civil Engineering with 70+ Recurring Clients

    With a 4-year average profit margin of 63%, this structural & offsite civil engineering firm has $1.1M in sales in the first 5 months of 2021! The sellers of this well-established firm will roll 20% equity and stay on board for up to 5 years. The majority of their 70+ recurring clients have been with them for a minimum of 8 years. Their client base is comprised of contractors, developers, architects, engineers, and owner-builders, Established since 2006, approximate sale size ranges from $20k-$60k for residential projects and $2k-$3k for the offsite civil structures. The hot residential market in Las Vegas has propelled this firm’s business to focus and specialize in custom, tract, and multifamily homes, as well as offsite civil structures. The team includes the 3 owners, who are licensed professional engineers (CE), 1 Senior Project Manager, 1 Drafter, and 2 regular professionals subcontracted as needed. The new owner would not need to be a licensed engineer; there would just need to be one on staff to stamp the drawings, designs, plans, etc.  

     

    The firm works out of a 4,000 sq. ft. building with 7 offices, a conference room, meeting room, IT room, and a bullpen with 6-cubicle workstations and a production area. The owners of the business also own the building (through a separate entity) and lease it to themselves for $7,000/month. (A fair market rate for rent would be in the $4,000/month range.)

     

    Priced at $6,350,000, the growth potential for this firm is substantial. With the constant influx of population, the Las Vegas construction market is booming with design demand in every sector. This demand yields several untapped markets in the region that this firm simply does not currently have the manpower to explore. A larger firm looking to expand into this hot market, or an existing firm that offers different services, could seamlessly merge with this versatile and well-recognized company to increase market share, and exponentially boost revenue. Having established a great reputation, this firm’s current marketing practice consists entirely of word-of-mouth advertising. So, updating their website, creating a social media presence, and implementing a marketing strategy could also lead to continued growth.

    PRICE $6,350,000 CASH FLOW $2,005,536

  • Sewer Pipeline Inspections in Honolulu with 55% Profit Margin

    With over $2M in sales in the last 12 months and nearly $2M in assets, this sewer pipeline inspection company in Honolulu has been established for over 15 years! Specializing in CCTV inspections of pipelines, their top-notch equipment and vehicles allow their well-trained PACP-certified staff to meet the needs of their client base, 90% of which consists of engineers for construction companies, municipalities, or consulting engineers. They also provide manhole/corrosion inspections, smoke testing, flow monitoring, and sewer/pipeline cleaning. Over $1M worth of vehicles including 3 CCTV trucks, 3 cleaning combo trucks, and 4 pickup trucks are part of the nearly $2M in business assets, as well $500k worth of generators, hand tools, computer equipment, and camera equipment, making the bank loan nearly 50% collateralized. The team consists of 10 full-time employees, including 1 Director of Operations, 1 Quality Control Supervisor, 1 Salesperson, and high skilled CCTV and Vactor Operators and field technicians. The owner currently manages business development, accounting, operations, administration, and IT and is willing to stay on for 2-3 years post-sale to ensure a smooth transition.

     

    The company’s average sale size is approximately $20k, with an average of 10 work orders per month. Currently, the business has $478k worth of work in their pipeline. The company was deemed essential during COVID, allowing them to increase their rates due to the increase in the need for PPE gear and adding trucks to accommodate social distancing guidelines.

     

    Priced at $4,025,000 and with a well-established reputation already in place, a new owner could easily boost sales by pursuing other areas in the general industry, such as construction and storm sewer system services. A 12.5% down payment of $503,125 returns $487,883 in the first year after debt payments – a 97% return on investment!

    PRICE $4,025,000 CASH FLOW $1,155,757

  • Environmental Consulting Services with $2.7M in Backlog

    With $2.7M in backlog, this environmental and engineering service provider has been serving developers, engineers, manufacturers, and municipalities since 1985! A highly trained team of 41 employees are in place, including 9 managers. Split into service groups, their qualified personnel are trained and certified as environmental professionals, mold inspectors, asbestos inspectors, asbestos management planners, professional geologists, brownfield redevelopment specialists, professional wetland scientists, underground storage tank professionals, remediation specialists, hazardous materials managers, and regulatory compliance managers. The owner/president would stay on for 1 year to aid in the transition, but for the right fit, would continue in sales/mediation for up to 10 years.

     

    Completing aver 12,000 projects in 28 states, mostly east of the Mississippi, this company has also done work in Mexico, Canada, and Eastern Europe. A continued area of growth is to expand the service concentration outside Michigan. Their work in process is nearly $840k, with a strong stream of work coming in.

     

    This company’s corporate headquarters is located in Brighton, Michigan. But there are additional offices located in Grand Rapids, Detroit, and Trenton. They even currently have a missionary office in Lexington, Kentucky out of a staff person’s home. At the purchase price of $3,195,000, a 12.5% down payment of $399,375 returns $389,992 in the first year after debt payments. That is a 97% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,195,000 CASH FLOW $879,305

  • Nationwide Multi-Year Government Contracts for Full-Service Marketing & PR

    Established 1996 and with multi-year sub-contracts ranging from $60-$420K per year for three to five years, this award winning full-service public relations and marketing firm has been serving their clients statewide, nationally and internationally for 20+ years.  Average value of prime contracts is $1M for 5-6 years and majority of their clients are recurring with 10+ year average tenure. They have a total of 12 clients, with multiple being contracts with state and federal agencies. One of their main clients with 6 multi-year contracts is recognized nationwide and internationally for its leadership and innovation and in many ways is ten years ahead of other states because this company has more experience in next generation intelligent transportation systems than any other communications and training firms in the country. From their Southeast US 5,500 square feet office with $300K worth of assets that includes digital production equipment, the firm provides public relations, digital marketing & advertising, knowledge transfer, research & strategic services all under one roof. With a 25% profit margin, they primarily serve government agencies, but also have clients in construction, automotive, and emerging technologies. In addition, they have a robust marketing process that has culminated in 8000+ industry leaders and decisionmakers who receive company e-newsletters on a regular basis.

    The firm’s reputation is so strong in the transportation industry it is consistently sought out as a teaming partner by an impressive list of engineering, intelligent transportation, and planning firms Like HDR, Atkins and Booz & Allen. They win large, impressive contracts competing against strong incumbents due to their proprietary processes and scalable platforms for RFP responses, as well as strong business relationships.

    They have a team of 31 highly skilled fulltime employees that include a creative director who has won numerous awards for the branding, websites and marketing collateral he has developed for this company’s clients. In general, many employees have 10+ year tenure with the company and have professional backgrounds in journalism.

    With the results of the presidential election, the public relations industry is convinced that an infrastructure bill is imminent and this company is positioned to ride this wave of opportunity and grow because they have been leading outreach efforts for next generation intelligent transportation systems and connected vehicles for 15 years. In addition, they have more experience in these future focused specialties than any other communications and training firm in the nation.

    PRICE $4,200,000 CASH FLOW $990,945

  • Scaffolding Equipment Rental Company – over $13M in Assets

    With a three-year average cash flow of $5,457,808, this company offers top-of-the-line scaffolding equipment to a diverse customer base of 500 customers in the Twin Cities metro area! They currently have 15 recurring clients that include general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair and installation contractors. They install, dismantle, rent, and sell frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms with 59% of their revenue coming from rentals. With only $1M in capex, this business has over $13M in assets and over $3.5M in work-in-progress and backlog. They are on average 70% utilized with about $9.9M in inventory out for rentals on a monthly basis. With $3.9M in hydro mobile inventory (70 – 75 units) they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 1-3 units of a competing brand. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market.

     

    This company does little to no marketing or advertising because they have recurring clients due to their top-notch customer service, delivery options and the quality of indoor and outdoor scaffolding. This business has a sister company (23% of revenue) that is Union based. Their current building space is 50,000 square feet with 3,000 square feet being the office building and 47,000 square feet of warehouse. There is also 1.2 acres yard for outside storage. 

     

    In any given month, they have around 150 work orders and their large projects that go for longer than on year are greater than $1M in value. Assets include almost $11M in scaffolding inventory and $1.6M in vehicles like trucks (5), 27-foot straight trucks, one-ton truck (1), pickups (20). Their current backlog of projects is about $3.5M and they are over $13M sales for 2020. At any given time, they have anywhere from 45 – 60 employees with 21 of them being office workers like sales representatives, office managers and the rest being laborers and contractors.

     

    Two of the owners focus primarily on sales and the third owner manages day to day business but they are currently transitioning responsibilities to other employees. Priced at $22,950,000, this is a business that is positioned to grow in the scaffolding space through acquisition of more inventory and expansion into different cities.

    PRICE $22,950,000 CASH FLOW $5,457,808

  • Commercial Roofing Company with 90 Employees

    With over $14.5M in sales and 90 W2 employees in place, the project size for this commercial roofing company ranges from $75k to $3.75M! Established for over 20 years and with 100% commercial clients, their focus is on larger industrial and institutional projects. Offering reroofing (50% of their revenue) new construction (40%) and repair & maintenance (10%) within a 75-mile radius of Pittsburgh, this team of 90 employees is comprised of 75 craftsmen and sheet metal workers, along with 15 salaried support staff. Boasting over $14M in sales in 2020, they self-perform 95% of their work, subbing out only as needed based on project size and ancillary services in the contract. Their clientele is a diverse assortment of consultants, general contractors, and private owners; this business is highly sought after in the greater Pittsburgh region.  They currently have 28 jobs that are in various stages of progress. With over $9M in assets, the bank loan is nearly 70% collateralized.

     

    The company is a mixture of union and non-union, with the union side making up 80% of their total sales and 60% of their current projects. Generally, they are the largest employer on a month-to-month basis in the union, they employ an average of 44 roofers and 15 sheet metal workers per day with a fairly even split of new construction vs. renovation, and mostly in the public sector. There are a large number of institutions in the area that require union members to perform their projects. The  non-union side is more in the private sector, with 80% of their revenue comprised of new construction.

     

    Priced at $13,425,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Pursuing more maintenance work and roofing-related sheet metal projects would certainly increase revenue. With already long-standing client relationships in place, organic growth is inevitable if services are expanded.

    PRICE $13,425,000 CASH FLOW $3,057,717

  • Mechanical Advisory Firm: Recurring Clients are 90% of Revenue

    With 90% of revenue coming from recurring clients, this mechanical advisory company subcontracts almost all their labor. They have been serving major commercial clients since 1992 in HVAC, mechanical, and plumbing and 80% of their business is from new construction with the remaining 20% coming from maintenance & repairs work. Deemed an essential business amid the pandemic, this company’s largest customers are food processing facilities and Amazon distribution centers, with a strong foothold in the logistical and institutional sectors. Their highly experienced team with 5+ year tenures, has over 100 years of combined experience; it consists of the owner, who acts as General Manager, plus 1 Project Manager, 1 Estimator, 1 Office Manager/Bookkeeper, and subcontractors as needed (3 of which are exclusive to this company).

    Using proprietary software that tracks the breakdown of all of their costs for each individual project has set them apart from the competition; it allows them to be exceptionally cost-conscious and pursue jobs that match their skill set, while being cost-effective. Clients know this company will always stay on budget. In addition, they have never lost money on a project due to their scientific approach to pricing.

    Established in 1992, they are a legacy company in the construction world; they receive invitations from the contracting and construction communities to bid a job and have a current win rate on bids of 50%!   This company does not market and advertising as 100% of their customers come from referrals from existing customers. With a current backlog of $6.5M, the team is committed to seeing a job through from beginning to end, from the bidding process to coordinating the resources and installation needed for the project. Services include plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, sprinklers, industrial gas fitting, steam fitting, process piping, and pneumatics.

    This would be a fantastic bolt-on opportunity for a control’s contractor, electrician, or civil contractor. Creating synergy between two companies would be an incredible opportunity to expand the market share and boost revenue.

     

    PRICE $11,750,000 CASH FLOW $2,416,800

  • High-End Residential & Hospitality Architecture – 37% Profit Margin

    With a 95% recurring client base, this niche architecture firm is well-established in the Greater Toronto Area. The firm has $10.3M in their pipeline with over 40 different clients over the next 3 years.  Their highly experienced team works out of a 7,500 sq. ft. leased space and includes 1 CFO, plus 2 registered architects on staff and 10 architectural technologists, all exceptionally skilled in the technical side of the full design process. Their projects range in size from small boutique hotels to grand golf course clubhouses throughout Canada, each one customized to fit their clients’ vision. The residential work includes high-end custom estate type homes up to $40M in value. The owners are willing to stay on for 2 to 3 years to assist in the transition and will finance or roll equity of 20% as a sign of faith and vested interest.

     

    The firm is renowned for their work at private public clubhouses and boutique hotels. Their comprehensive services include conceptual and schematic design, design development and construction documentation, permits and approvals, contractor bidding and/or negotiating, and construction contract administration. They have fixed fees for their clients, which helps bring in a tremendous number of commercial projects. One owner does large-scale project management and financials, while the other does small-scale project management. Both are accounted for in the cash flow analysis.

     

    Priced at $5,450,000, growth potential is substantial. This business has seen steady growth in sales and profitability in the past 4 years; increasing marketing and promotional materials, focusing on high-end small boutique hotels throughout Canada, and expanding current client relationships would certainly lead to continued growth. The company’s owner and 2 on staff are members of the Ontario Association of Architects, and the owner holds licenses with British Columbia and Nova Scotia, as well as NCARB licensing in New York and Arizona.

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $2,456,825

  • Millwork Manufacturing for Churches & Schools with $6.4M in Backlog

    With 30 signed contracts worth $6.4M on the books for 2021, this year is looking to be the most profitable year on record for this custom millwork manufacturing company!  Being considered an essential business, they have not been impacted by COVID. Based in a 10,000 sq. ft. facility with 900k+ in equipment and assets, this custom millwork business is affiliated with all major contractors in Utah. Established for 25 years and licensed in Utah, California, Idaho, New Mexico, and Hawaii, their clients include schools, churches, hospitals, corporate offices, universities, and government buildings, along with some residential work in apartment complexes, homes, and condos. Assets include CNC routers, a horizontal boring machine, gliding saw, state-of-the art bander, table saw, chop saws, timesaver sander, a state-of-the-art spray booth for finish work, plus all of the basic equipment & tools needed for each job. The highly skilled team is comprised of the owner, who handles general oversight, 1 Shop Forman, 2 Project Managers, 1 Estimator, 1 Production Manager, 1 Office Manager, 4 Installers, 10-15 Fabricators, and subcontracted installers as needed.

     

    The business is licensed in Hawaii, which is a major advantage, as there is very little competition; the company has completed $4M worth of work there.  Their reputation has earned them several contracts with top-name businesses, religious affiliations, and area universities.

     

    Priced at $2,900,000, this company is in a prime position for growth!  At max capacity in their current facility, expanding their labor force and facility would lead to incredible revenue growth. There is also strong potential to take over the market share in the region, as many smaller businesses will not survive the pandemic. A 12.5% down payment of $362,500 will return $382,999 in the first year after debt payments – a 106% return on investment.

    PRICE $2,900,000 CASH FLOW $753,860

  • NYC Marketing Agency - 27% Profit Margin

     

    The average client tenure for this New York City full-service creative agency is 14 years! Maintaining a 90+% recurring client base this agency provides the full gamut of advertising services across all media facets, with one simple philosophy: Great creative needs to change someone’s mind. The experienced team handles brand strategy, messaging strategy, campaign development, website development, CRM, email marketing, content marketing, employee engagement, marketing collateral and media planning and buying. The typical project scope runs from $20,000 to $150,000. With over $71k in work-in-progress and a team with strong financial wherewithal, this company is prime for purchase for anyone who wants to get involved in something proven and profitable. The three owners currently handle client relationships, financial management, and creative products; they are willing to stay on for up to three years and do a promissory note of 10% plus an equity roll of 10-15%.

    Primarily working with financial/retirement services, insurance, technology and healthcare categories, this agency is involved in industries that are playing an important role right now and using this opportunity to catch up in the digital space. The team consists of 30 full-time senior creative copy, creative art, strategy and client service staff; consultants and freelancers are subcontracted out as needed. This senior focused staffing approach enables this agency to work quickly and efficiently even under the most difficult circumstances.   The core staff is comprised of seasoned senior executives who have worked for large global advertising agencies.

    The agency implemented a successful work-from-home strategy in early March to improve work/life balance among the team. The timeliness of this implementation allowed them to transition nearly seamlessly through the difficulties of the pandemic. The company is still being run 100% remotely and is going strong.

    Priced at $10,750,000, this agency has outstanding opportunity for growth. By continuing to build new client relationships, while cultivating existing connections, a new owner could certainly take this company to the next level.

     

    PRICE $10,800,000 CASH FLOW $2,657,968

  • Multi-Engineering Services in Toronto – over $4.6M in Sales

    With over $4.6M in sales and a 31% profit margin in 2020, this Toronto-based engineering consulting firm has seen steady growth over the years. With solid long-term relationships established with their clients throughout Canada, they offer a variety of services including geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring, noise & vibration monitoring, geotechnical engineering & material testing, building design, environmental engineering, civil engineering design & planning, hydrogeological engineering, Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) scanning services, noise impact studying, and construction dust monitoring.  Taking on large, long-term projects for transit authorities, governmental organizations, and general contractors, this company has wide-ranging capabilities creating a consolidated resource for customers to meet their project goals. A focus of the company is on transit systems including tunneling, subway, rail and subway stations, bridges, sewer and water infrastructure, and highways. Their 50 personnel includes professional engineers, architects, subject matter experts, software engineers, surveyors, accounting, and administration.

    The owner of this business currently oversees operations and is a reliable and very knowledgeable resource for employees. The owner manages the strong growth trajectory and supports positive client relationships.  To continue revenue growth, one could consider offering commissions to the sales team to boost external relationships networking and earning additional contracts.  

    Operations are managed from the 10,000 square foot headquarters located in the Greater Toronto Area. The company has over 15 years of experience serving Canada, and has expanded its business to Trinidad, Tobago, Turkey, China, and the United States.

    PRICE $8,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,420,321

  • Solar Panel Install Since 1977

    This Southeast Iowa company has been well-known throughout the Midwest region since 1977! Specializing in solar installation, sign installation, and electrical construction for farmers, commercial & residential clients, and the industrial sector, the business has $3M worth of secured work to take them through the rest of 2020 and into 2021. The exceptionally highly skilled team includes 2 owners, one of which is an Electrical Engineer – the other is a Master Electrician and superintendent, along with a CFO, 1 accountant, 4 solar crew leaders, 6 electrical crew leaders, 2 sign installers, 1 FT mechanic, 2 assistant project managers, 2 solar sales reps, and 15-20 electrical apprentices to assist as needed. Their facilities are comprised of a 2,000 sq. ft. office/crew space, a 2,400 sq. ft. mechanic shop, 9,000 sq. ft. trailer parking space, and a combined total of 34,200 sq. ft. in equipment/material storage and truck parking.

     

    The business has a considerable amount of assets, including several cube vans, trucks, trailers, generators, electric benders, welders, trenchers, backhoes, and an extensive amount of other equipment and tools.  They use Foundation, which is a construction specific software designed for remote use, as well as PVsyst and Helioscope for solar design, and ConEst for estimating services.

     

    With a solid team and an outstanding reputation in place, this company’s services are sought out by solar developers in the region. Substantial growth opportunities are on the horizon, as important strategic partnerships are developing, and the solar industry is soaring.

    PRICE $6,600,000 CASH FLOW $1,345,934

  • Railroad Terminal Logistics – Absentee Owner

     

    This rail freight and bulk transfer logistics business has 4 locations in Pennsylvania & New York supporting a very diversified customer & industry base!  This business has a 32% profit margin, over $2M in assets, and been deemed an essential business during COVID. Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. Everyone on the team of 36 highly experienced staff is cross-trained and can work at each separate entity within this company. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers. The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

    Substantial growth is inevitable for this family of companies. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services would be tremendous and diversified.

     

    PRICE $7,750,000 CASH FLOW $1,428,816

  • Construction Management for Healthcare & Industrial Markets

    The owners of this Southeastern Pennsylvania Construction Management company will stay on board for 3-5 years! Well-established for over 40 years, they serve a diverse customer base covering an array of industries. Typically, they have healthcare projects running, with three individuals on staff who are certified healthcare constructors. They work within several general industrial markets, such as the food industry, with clients in snack food, dairy, and meat production, as well as industrial clients in various other production facilities. In addition to that core work, they serve general commercial business needs, including office and retail space.   They offer pre-construction services (site analysis/selection, project budget development, project planning & scheduling, land development coordination, etc.), along with complete construction management services, and post-occupancy follow-up and maintenance contracts, making sure each project is guided from beginning to end. Tracking approximately 400 projects per year, a large portion of their business is from repeat clients, generally over 60% annually, with some customers having 25-year tenure with the company.

     

    The company’s staff works out of a leased 26,000 sq. foot industrial building, which includes 18,500 sq. ft. of warehouse, storage, and woodshop area. Along with the 2 owners, who oversee daily operations, office management, and accounting, the team consists of 5 Project Managers and 17 full-time office staff, field employees, and carpenters. 18 trucks, 4 passenger vehicles, and a skid loader make up $760k in assets.

     

    Priced at $3,600,000, this business is in a prime position for growth. Increasing advertising would capture more market share and would expand this company’s footprint far and wide. A 12.5% down payment of $450,000 returns $472,858 in the first year after debt payments – a 105% return on investment!

    PRICE $3,600,000 CASH FLOW $1,505,559

  • Industrial Cleaning and Maintenance — 90% Collateralized

    This oil field service company specializes in turnaround and industrial cleaning services for oil, gas and utility companies and is 90% collateralized! Handling all aspects for the disposal of drilling waste in the oil and gas sector, this company currently has 250 clients with 50 of those recurring. 70% of their revenue comes from turnaround and industrial cleaning services; the other 30% is a mixture of maintenance, water delivery, vegetation control, water truck services, mobile steaming and equipment rentals. Personnel includes 1 Regional Manager, 1 Dispatcher, 1 Safety Officer, 1 Mechanic, 2 Junior Mechanics, 1 Shop Hand/Assistant, and 15-22 Operators/Assistants. The 2 owners work remotely doing general business oversight and accounting & payroll management. Their vast array of high-quality equipment is comprised of hydro vacs, combo vacs, tank trucks, straight vacs, water trucks, mobile steamers, pressure trucks, and maintenance units. The business is COR Certified, Comply Works Certified, and belongs to ISNetworld.

    The company’s leased space consists of an 11-acre industrial fully fenced yard site, a 750 sq. ft. office with 4 maintenance bays, and a 5-bedroom crew house.

    Promoting their one-stop-shop service, hiring a salesperson, increasing truck utilization, and expanding into neighboring communities would undoubtedly grow the business and increase revenue.

    Some key information:

    • Tremendous signage, word-of-mouth referrals, and a rock-solid reputation gives this company a firm grasp on the area.
    • 70% of the company’s revenue comes from turnaround and industrial cleaning services.
    • This company currently has 250 clients with 50 of those recurring.
    At the purchase price of $2,875,000 CAD, this business is 90% collateralized.

    PRICE $2,875,000 CASH FLOW $1,002,929

  • Wireless Tech Company with over $6M in Sales

    This business with over $6M in sales has been supplying professional services for some the wireless industry’s largest companies! With an owner that only performs high-level oversight and has no daily role, this engineering company has over 20 years of telecommunications experience, specializing in Wireless Technology Services, Network Roll-out, and Project Management. Along with offering expert design, service analysis, and solutions for a wide range of technologies, they also provide site acquisition and technology consulting for wireless vendors and service providers focused on wireless networks.

    Their staff is known for providing first-rate wireless engineering solutions, network design and implementation services to wireless vendors and carriers, making them a “one-stop-shop” for their customers. See company benefits below:

    • Number of projects and volumes have increased since COVID-19
    • Not relationship driven – more reputation driven based on quality of work and brand and experience in the market
    • Authorized Service Provider (ASP) for wireless vendor OEMs and wireless carriers
    • No dedicated salesperson: they receive enough work from clients as an approved tier one vendor (Verizon, Sprint/T-Mobile)

    This company was founded in Seattle, WA in 2001 and is now located in Tustin, CA with warehouse locations around the US. With 82 employees, they are known to deliver the highest industry standard.

     

    As the telecommunications industry expands with every passing year, the growth opportunities are infinite for this firm. The company could expand to as much as $9M top line revenue in the next year or two; 5G expansion is going to lead to 3 to 4 years’ worth of business in both the Telecom and Mobile Divisions.

    PRICE $7,930,000 CASH FLOW $1,986,249

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Mid-Atlantic Architecture Firm with 80+ Employees

    With nearly $17M in sales in 2020, this multi-location architecture firm has a team of 80+ employees in place and the owners will stay on board for 2-10+ years! Established in 1973, the business has a 3-year average cash flow of $2.7M and a 16% average profit margin. Serving regionally in Pennsylvania, Delaware, New Jersey, and Maryland, the firm specializes in in architecture (75%), interior design (20%), and landscape architecture. The majority of their client base is in the private sector, with a significant portion of those being developers for individual corporate clients and higher education. Their highly skilled team of many long-tenured employees includes the 7 owners, 20 Registered Architects, 6 Senior Architectural Designers, 20 Intern Architects, 14 Interior Designers, 2 in Landscape Architecture, and 9 Operations Associates; all staff members serve firm-wide functions. The owners have identified five future leaders of the firm, as well as additional staff who they believe have the aptitude to grow into leadership roles in the future.

     

    The firm is known for providing top-notch architecture and design services in the area for 47 years.  Due to the diversity of the market sectors they serve, they fared exceptionally well in 2020 compared to some of their peers who are more specialized. Their 2020 revenue nearly matched 2019, and with the help of a PPP loan that was 100% forgiven, they were able to maintain their staff level with no reduced hours or furloughs.

    Priced at $11,640,000, there is immense growth potential through a smaller bolt-on acquisition, and a new owner could expand the market share in healthcare and senior living. The current owners want to establish an economically sustainable model for the purchase of shares from the three principals who will reach retirement age within the next 3 to 7 years. A sale could also provide the opportunity for enhanced growth.

    PRICE $11,640,000 CASH FLOW $2,720,030

  • Management of Residential & Commercial Improvement Projects

    With little to no overhead and a 129% return on investment, this well-established company offers one-stop project management services for residential, commercial, and government clients. This business has been serving Seattle and surrounding areas since 2004, launching as a franchise in 2019 to become more community-focused; offering expert training and support for all operational aspects of the business, their company goal is 100% franchisee satisfaction. Outsourcing all facility improvements, the current team  includes 4 Project Managers, 1 Sales Representative, and 1 Project Team Admin. All hands-on work is completed by subcontractors, reducing the need for large equipment investments, inventory storage, or a large team. This asset-light company uses digital management programs to manage and execute projects, keeping up-front costs down and profit margins up. The current owner does some project management, along with oversight of operations.

     

    With a well-established clientele, the company specializes in the management of construction projects which includes roofing, concrete or asphalt, turf installation, landscape construction, and snow removal.  Aside from snow removal, most services are large ticket construction services such as outdoor living spaces, concrete projects, repaving parking lots, or landscape construction.  They also provide Coronavirus Protective Services, including interior & exterior sanitation, physical barrier installation, board-up services, emergency electrical services, and emergency plumbing services.

    Great growth is possible through networking and building the customer base, targeted advertising, or expanding the territory as allowed. All territories can be managed with a team of four or less, and with minimal office space per territory.

    PRICE $5,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,533,254

  • Environmental Services for Commercial Clientele

    Passive ownership with 37 skilled employees in Washington! Located in the Seattle, Washington area, these specialists in the environmental industry have earned a 25% profit margin in 2018 and continue to experience year-over-year growth.  Asbestos removal (40%), interior demolition (40%), as well as mold and lead remediation (20%) are the main services offered by this company.  Commercial clients account for 80% of annual contract revenues, with residential projects producing 20%.  Clients include The Federal Government, Washington State Universities and schools, local municipalities, and health care facilities.  Day-to-day operations are led by a tenured vice president with management oversight of two administrative assistants, three estimators with project management experience, three operations managers, seven supervisors and the workforce.  The owner currently leads in a consultant capacity mentoring and developing leadership staff while also ensuring bonding and insurance.

     

    With a total of 9,300 square feet of space, the headquarters has ample room to further expand operations.  The office is 2,800 square feet and features five private offices, a reception area, a large conference room used for meetings, training, and environmental records storage.   The warehouse and shop span 6,500 square feet of indoor space allowing for staging, tool and inventory storage, and warehouse management.  An expansive paved lot and gravel yard of two acres house all heavy equipment, vehicles, disposal containers, and trailers.  Assets comprise all equipment necessary for safe testing, handling, and removal of hazardous materials.

     

    Strong revenue generating initiatives could be achieved by increasing the workforce to take on contracts currently sacrificed, driving growth of the container rental business, and utilizing targeted advertising to generate new contacts.

    PRICE $5,100,000 CASH FLOW $1,112,023

  • Electric & Security Automation Subcontractors with over $10M in Sales

    This business one of the largest electric and security automation subcontractors in the region, boasting over $10M in sales and a diverse client base comprised of schools, airports, casinos, distribution centers, municipalities, manufacturers, and venues!  65% of their revenue is new installs in existing buildings – which turn into maintenance revenue, which accounts for 35% of sales. With over 50 current employees, the owner of this business is willing to remain part of the team for 1-2 years.

    These specialty contractors focus on specialized electrical and low voltage work including automation, security, infrastructure, and industrial projects. Seven of the over fifty employees focus on administrative tasks, while the rest are union employees who work on-site.  The well-rounded crews include project managers as well as supervising managers.  The owners currently focus on estimations, project management and business oversight and are not in the field.  Projects often include large-scale security system installation, industrial machine installation and maintenance, complete electrical installation, data center electrical work, and the installation of building automation with related controls.  They focus on data/security and automation. 

    The $753,000 in assets includes Shop tools, furniture, fixtures, electric benders, tugger, high voltage tester, 2014 John Deer tractor, off road ATV, conduit bender a track loader, 9 Ford trucks, 6 Chevy Trucks, 2 trailers, 1 load haul and 1 GMC truck.

    Priced at $6,315,000, the company has shown exceptional growth over the years and the transition to electrical focused services has benefited this company.  A continued dedication to automation, data centers, and security could generate future growth. Return on investment in the first year after debt payments is 108%.

    PRICE $6,315,000 CASH FLOW $1,697,195

  • Environmental & Biological Firm with a 36% Profit Margin

    This full-service environmental advisory firm has 80% private clients & public agencies and 20% federal government contracts and over 25 years of experience! Specializing in the preparation of CEQA/NEPA documents, biological, regulatory and cultural services, they are known as intellectual leaders in the environmental community. This highly focused team of 23 professionals with decades of experience leads clients through complex local, state and federal agency processes with excellence and maintains their business year over year. The seller is also willing to remain on for 2-4 years. They have a 36% profit margin and $5M in the pipeline!

    They serve a myriad of clients, working on jobs ranging from smaller development projects to $1.8 billion transportation improvements. Clients include builders/developers, cities, counties, water districts, school districts, the State of California, Caltrans, and metropolitan planning organizations throughout Southern California.

    This firm is focused on providing superior service to existing clients, identifying new potential clients and participating in the Women Transportation Seminar, American Planning Association and Association of Environmental Professionals.

    The owner currently works on business development and project/ financial oversight. Growth opportunities include the expansion of cultural and CEQA services as they become leading divisions for the company. 

     

    PRICE $9,225,000 CASH FLOW $1,688,412

  • Environmental Based Services - Lead, Mold & Asbestos

     

    A 12.5% down payment of $681,250 returns $691,301 in the first year after debt payments!  The seller is willing to hold 15% of the note and is willing to do either a seller carry or equity hold for that amount.  With a team of 90+ employees, this company allows for passive ownership. The team of well-trained specialists provide exceptional asbestos abatement, lead and mold remediation services.   With most projects one to two weeks in duration, this company completes 800 jobs per year.   Annually, there are typically one or two very large projects that bring in over 10% of income, but the projects and customers vary from year-to-year.  The diverse customer base includes industrial businesses (<5%), commercial companies (90%) and homeowners (<10%).   

     

    Leveraging their $3,004,099 in assets as well as their team of 75 union workers, this well-established company is efficient, driven, and well-respected for their industry knowledge.  They are often called upon to successfully complete projects that others consider exceedingly technical, challenging, or too large.  Located in a large facility, the warehouse has storage space for all equipment and inventory, while the office can house the 17-member administrative team comfortably.  This location will be for sale outside the sale of the business.

     

    The owners are not involved in the day-to-day operations, rather lending their skills to business analysis, financial management, and process improvement. 

     

    PRICE $5,450,000 CASH FLOW $1,456,295

  • Media & Marketing Agency in Bulgaria - 29% Profit Margin

    This Firm has 64 employees (38 FT and 26 PT) making it turnkey and set up for an incoming buyer to take over. Silicon Valley of Eastern Europe – Sofia, Bulgaria.  The owner is willing to remain as the general manager for 3+ years! They boast a very diverse client base, with 30% being local and regional, and 70% being international clients.

    This top internationally recognized media management and marketing agency earns $2MM (BGN) in gross revenue and $784,000 (BGN) in cash flow.  The highly regarded team provides top to bottom media communications services including advising, training and education, graphic design, as well as crisis management.  The Seller, currently operating in an oversight capacity, is also willing to remain on as GM (if desired) for 3 years post-sale. This would ensure a smooth transition for not only clients but staff as well.  

    Completing over 5,000 projects in the past two decades, strategic creativity abounds amongst this team of seventy-four.  Specialists in crisis management, public affairs, and public relations work directly with clients to manage their brand through multi-faceted communication channels including social media sites, web site development, television, public appearances, media interaction, and radio.  This well-trained and educated team run day-to-day operations effectively while the owner is meeting with clients both in and out of the country and no billable hours.  Though a new owner would not need to travel, the team frequently travels locally, regionally, and internationally. 

    Fully equipped with beautiful furniture and fixtures, as well as cutting edge professional tools, the building is owned by the seller and is available for continued lease.

     

     

    PRICE $1,400,000 CASH FLOW $784,000

Logistics/Distribution/Procurement (10)

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Railroad Terminal Logistics – Absentee Owner

     

    This rail freight and bulk transfer logistics business has 4 locations in Pennsylvania & New York supporting a very diversified customer & industry base!  This business has a 32% profit margin, over $2M in assets, and been deemed an essential business during COVID. Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. Everyone on the team of 36 highly experienced staff is cross-trained and can work at each separate entity within this company. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers. The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

    Substantial growth is inevitable for this family of companies. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services would be tremendous and diversified.

     

    PRICE $7,750,000 CASH FLOW $1,428,816

  • E-Commerce Sales of Work at Height & Fall Arrest Gear

    With 80% of sales through Amazon, this e-commerce business has customers spanning the country and is currently managed by the owner from a home office. With over 12,000 customers nationwide, the company offers a variety of work at height and fall arrest gear for customers in various fields of work, including fire departments, military, FBI, industrial, and the movie/music industry. Examples of customers in need of these products: wind turbine technicians, cell tower climbers, stadium/arena rigging technicians, mid-to-high rise window cleaners, scaffolders, roofers, construction workers, firefighters, lighting technicians, steelworkers, and glaziers. The owner manages all sales & order processing full-time, while one part-time employee spends 2 hours/day packing orders into boxes. A unique software system is in place that integrates orders from various locations automatically. Although the company represents $15M worth of 3,000+ products on their website, it only carries $65k-$85k of inventory at any one time, with inventory moving & changing on a daily basis. With this highly automated system, the business can process 50 orders in under an hour.

     

    Using 5 primary vendors, the owner orders inventory on a daily basis, with up to 15 purchase orders per day. It can take 2-4 days to get that inventory, and it moves quickly once received. After processing a customer’s order, the system generates the invoice & label, the item is boxed, and all orders are picked up from the home office by FedEx and UPS Postal Express on a daily basis at no charge.

     

    Although some clients order directly through the company’s own website, approximately 80% of orders are through Amazon, and around $6k in sales per month are through eBay. Priced at $782,000, this ecommerce business truly has the potential to triple in revenue. A new owner could invest in more inventory and increase the number of vendors; with the right strategy in place, sales would go through the roof.

    PRICE $782,000 CASH FLOW $226,765

  • Non-Commercial Aircraft Inspections & Maintenance w/ 25+ Recurring Clients

    This corporate aircraft maintenance & inspection business has $1.2M in projected revenue for 2021! With 25+ recurring clients, their primary customer base consists of aircraft managers and brokers.  Aircraft maintenance accounts include routine maintenance, inspections, and annual inspections required by the FAA. Two FAA certified mechanics lead the team – one IA Certified and one AP certified. Multi-engine planes require inspections after a certain number of hours flown. Current customers allow access to a maintenance portal that shows hours logged per aircraft, giving them the capability of knowing the work that needs done in the near future and securing the work with the aircraft managers. The FAA requires a logbook entry for each inspection; this team requires payment from their customer prior to logging the inspection, ensuring full and on-time payments each time. Sale sizes range from $2k (for small maintenance jobs) to $22k for an average inspection, all the way up to $50-$60k for the larger maintenance projects.

     

    In June of 2020, the business expanded into three hangers, each approximately 3,600 sq. ft. Currently, one hanger is being rented by an outside party ($2,000/month), and one hanger is a double without an inner wall. The rented hanger was built to allow the business to pursue military contracts, as those planes require a separate facility from commercial/general aviation.

     

    Priced at $649,000, a buyer would see a 141% return on investment in the first year after debt payments. With ample room for growth, this business has tremendous potential!  Pursuing military contracts would boost revenue, as well as taking on ex-military aircraft mechanics in apprentice roles for 3 months and setting up satellite offices at other airports that can’t justify a full-time maintenance facility.

    PRICE $649,000 CASH FLOW $174,945

  • Amazon E-Commerce Dropship Vendor w/ $1.2M Cashflow

    This dropship vendor provides necessary janitorial, PPE, and office supplies through Amazon and other marketplaces! Using Channel Advisor software, which can manage up to 1 million SKUs, this business manages over 400,000 products with 20+ vendors, and resells on their website and marketplaces. They currently do no marketing or advertising.

    Every order placed online is drop-shipped directly from the wholesaler or manufacturer in 2-3 business days to the consumer/business – they carry little to no inventory and have almost no overhead. With an integrated ordering system already in place, their software is ideal for the high volume of products this company sells.

    • They continue to add 2-3 vendors per year, each providing a greater variety of products.  Recently, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices.
    • 95% of revenue comes from large name marketplace retailers, while 5% comes directly from the website.
    • 75% of website sales come from the consumer and 25% from business accounts.
    • Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability.
    • Providing quality products at a low price, the product mark-up is between 28-48%. Excellent relationships with the wholesalers help them deliver their low-price guarantee, as well as superb customer service.
    •  A small storage facility in the Southeast, US is currently used to handle returns to the wholesalers.
    This company priced at $3,025,000 is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. Securing additional contracts directly with hospitals and corporations would also boost sales.

    PRICE $3,025,000 CASH FLOW $1,151,411

  • Online Medical Equipment: 100% Dropship

    This completely remote internet-enabled, multi-channel distributor of medical, surgical and therapy supplies and equipment provides over 40,000 discounted medical supplies and was established in 1989. As a pioneer in online medical supplies, this 100% drop shipper runs on thin margins to provide services to all, with 80% of the business serving consumers (e-commerce) and the other 20% serving businesses. By ordering medical supplies in advance, users and organizations, including nursing homes and assisted living facilities, can bring in cost efficiencies. As a BBB accredited business with A+ rating, they are able to keep their prices low by being an online company and not having the added expense of a retail store.

    This company never sees the product but is simply the middleman between manufacturers/suppliers and the consumer. Therefore, no lease is needed, and the owner can run the company from any location. The current owner is thinking about retirement but is wanting to stay with the company for as long as needed to continue to work and aid in the transition.

    COVID-19 has brought in new opportunities such as wholesale and brokering. These areas can continue to be expanded on to further increase sales and profit margins. Their current relationship with manufacturers and suppliers as well as their reputation in customer service has allowed the company to continue in their success and provide low-cost new quality products.

    At the purchase price of $1,075,000, a 10% down payment of $102,800 returns $179,811 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 167% return on investment.

    PRICE $1,075,000 CASH FLOW $318,434

  • Contract Manufacturer of Corporate & Collegiate Headwear, Bags, & Apparel

    With nearly $60M in sales in 2020, this contract manufacturing company has a full management staff already in place! Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production/manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already established, they have been able to solidify themselves in the market, acting as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors.

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days.

    Priced at $15,900,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $15,900,000 CASH FLOW $4,161,997

  • Medical Equipment Renter with 1,800+ Patients

    With 18 qualified and knowledgeable employees, this home medical and respiratory equipment provider has been established for more than 50 years! Personnel includes 8 full-time and 10 part-time employees in customer service, billing, delivery, and respiratory; they qualify patients to receive equipment and products that will be covered by the client’s insurance plan. This company provides guidance to clinicians and other professional healthcare workers on how to request equipment and services for patients. With over $600,000 in assets and a 15% profit margin, sales and cash flow grew in 2020 even amidst COVID-19. This company’s primary value proposition is that they help patients and their families navigate the complex health care environment and obtain medical equipment and supplies. They currently have 1,800+ patients with equipment on rent; rental income is approximately 72% of monthly revenue. They have long term relationships with the medical community and are a preferred provider for the country of Santa Clara Health System.

     

    With limited marketing, clients come in from referrals, insurance, and contracting. Some areas of growth include implementing integrated web commerce and telephony systems and home fill oxygen solution for portable tanks, bring billing process in house or negotiate better rates for outsourced billing, expand wound vacuum referrals and lymphedema therapy referrals, and explore telemedicine remote monitoring services for Medicare patients.

     

    The two owners are planning for retirement and have set no specific time frame for involvement but anticipate some form of personal service agreements and/or W2 employment for undetermined length of time after the transaction. They want a successful transition to ensure clients remain with the company long term.

    PRICE $1,650,000 CASH FLOW $432,448

  • Scaffolding Equipment Rental Company – over $13M in Assets

    With a three-year average cash flow of $5,457,808, this company offers top-of-the-line scaffolding equipment to a diverse customer base of 500 customers in the Twin Cities metro area! They currently have 15 recurring clients that include general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair and installation contractors. They install, dismantle, rent, and sell frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms with 59% of their revenue coming from rentals. With only $1M in capex, this business has over $13M in assets and over $3.5M in work-in-progress and backlog. They are on average 70% utilized with about $9.9M in inventory out for rentals on a monthly basis. With $3.9M in hydro mobile inventory (70 – 75 units) they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 1-3 units of a competing brand. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market.

     

    This company does little to no marketing or advertising because they have recurring clients due to their top-notch customer service, delivery options and the quality of indoor and outdoor scaffolding. This business has a sister company (23% of revenue) that is Union based. Their current building space is 50,000 square feet with 3,000 square feet being the office building and 47,000 square feet of warehouse. There is also 1.2 acres yard for outside storage. 

     

    In any given month, they have around 150 work orders and their large projects that go for longer than on year are greater than $1M in value. Assets include almost $11M in scaffolding inventory and $1.6M in vehicles like trucks (5), 27-foot straight trucks, one-ton truck (1), pickups (20). Their current backlog of projects is about $3.5M and they are over $13M sales for 2020. At any given time, they have anywhere from 45 – 60 employees with 21 of them being office workers like sales representatives, office managers and the rest being laborers and contractors.

     

    Two of the owners focus primarily on sales and the third owner manages day to day business but they are currently transitioning responsibilities to other employees. Priced at $22,950,000, this is a business that is positioned to grow in the scaffolding space through acquisition of more inventory and expansion into different cities.

    PRICE $22,950,000 CASH FLOW $5,457,808

  • Manufacturing & Installation of Custom-Fitted Furniture

    Priced at $710,000, a down payment of $71,000 returns $114,565 in the first year after debt payments – a 161% return on investment! With an extremely diverse client base consisting of both residential and commercial customers, this company specializes in custom fitted furniture for schools, healthcare facilities, churches, and corporate offices, as well as residents in the Twin Cities region. There is a well-trained team of 10 already in place that includes designers, sales representatives, and accounting staff, as well as employees who focus on production, assembly, delivery, and installation.  Their mission is to provide the client with individually designed, high quality furniture solutions at a fraction of the cost of custom-made furniture. This dynamic company utilizes in-house engineering and manufacturing as well as outside resources to create beautiful solutions that fit any space perfectly, maximizing storage and functionality. The team successfully altered their process 2020 to include virtual design consultations and they are following all necessary protocols for in-home meetings, deliveries, and installations.

     

    The modular furniture system includes components for offices, storage spaces, bedrooms, home entertainment areas, wall beds, closets, and garages.  The owners focus on managing the daily operations including design, sales, ordering, production, marketing, and financial oversight.

     

    Operations are managed from their conveniently located headquarters with ample space for the showroom, offices, and work area for manufacturing and assembly.  Continued growth can be found through increased marketing and networking to residential clients who are working from home. With work already in the pipeline and a flexible transition period, this business is ready for the next owner to step in for continued growth and success.    

    PRICE $710,000 CASH FLOW $206,120

  • Omaha Childcare Center – 12k sq. ft. Facility

    With an increasing net income year after year, even in COVID-19, and with a continued high profit margin, this stand-alone childcare facility serves children from 6 weeks to 6 years and older. This childcare specializes in an all-inclusive enrichment, aiming to create a well-rounded learning experience. Investing over $13,200 in curriculum and with a curriculum specialist on staff, there are weekly learning curriculum which involves areas of STEM, music, art and social interaction, there are age appropriate so that all ages can participate.

     

    The current owner is 95% absentee and operates the business remotely with their current responsibilities only including finances and payroll. The staff of 19 employees (15FT and 4PT) includes a Director who runs the day-to-day operations, an Assistant Director, a Curriculum Director, and Teachers.

     

    Located in a 12,000 square foot free-standing building that includes an activity center, lunchroom, 8 separate classrooms, playground, multi-use area, the center is licensed for 125, and has a current attendance of 75-90 children and a capacity of 150. Title XX makes up 60% of enrollments.

     

    With an excellent reputation in the community, this full-scale daycare pulls from a variety of nearby premium schools.  Transportation to and from school is provided, and school-aged children can enroll for summer camp and attend full-day childcare on school holidays and snow days.

    PRICE $705,000 CASH FLOW $162,661

  • Southwest Omaha Nail Salon & Spa

    With over $470,000 in buildout and assets, this truly gorgeous nail salon and spa is near a highly desirable intersection with excellent visibility from passing traffic! The build-out of the space was done very well and great care was taken to provide a luxurious and upscale environment for relaxation.  Assets include valuable aesthetics, tools, equipment, appliances, and technology.  The 3,400 square feet of space features a nice reception area to welcome customers, many pedicure stations that can accommodate dry and wet services, manicure stations with proper venting for acrylic nails, and esthetic rooms that are set-up and ready for a massage therapist or esthetician.  With 11 experienced employees, current services include manicures (acrylic, dip, gel, shellac, polish), pedicures (gel, shellac, polish), and spa services (eyelashes, wax, massage, facials, etc.).  The clientele is primarily female in the 35+ age bracket; in general, they are loyal to service providers and tend to have more of a disposable income to see their technician on a regular basis.

     

    One receptionist manages the front desk, while three nail techs, four general techs, and three estheticians provide services to the customers.  Staff are contracted employees except for the receptionist.  All nail techs, general techs, and estheticians are 1099 contractors who work as needed, reducing an owner’s employee costs.

     

    Priced at $275,000, this salon is ready for continued operations.  Investment could be made in engaging on social media and boosting reviews on platforms. Expansion of esthetics services is a large area for potential growth as is the market for bridal parties, birthday celebrations, or holiday gatherings. Hiring a hair stylist would also be an opportunity for business growth, as well as offering couple massages and expanding existing hours.

    PRICE $275,000

  • Drive-Through & Takeout Pizza Joint in Northeastern Connecticut

    With 90% of sales being takeout and self-performed delivery, this homemade pizza joint includes over $150,000 in assets upon its purchase! Located in Northeastern Connecticut, this restaurant serves pizza 50% through takeout and drive-through, 40% through delivery, and the other 10% through dine-in and catering. It is the only pizza joint in its market that offers a drive-through option. The company was established as a small take-out pizza shop in 1986 by the current owner’s father; the owner opened this location in 2009. Because of the long history in the community, this restaurant has a strong brand presence, being a long-term staple in the area. There are 20 qualified and reliable personnel in place with 3 being full-time and 17 being part-time. The full-time manager, assistant manager, and shift supervisor take care of the daily activities, allowing the owner to only handle general oversight.

     

    Due to COVID-19, the pizza joint had to close for two weeks. But even so, the sales are up from last year given that dine-in was only 10% of sales before COVID-19. They plan to open limited dining soon. With an expansion in catering and alcohol sales, this restaurant would see continued growth.

     

    Priced at $470,000, a 15% down payment of $70,500 returns $87,207 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 124% return on investment.

    PRICE $470,000 CASH FLOW $146,810

  • $80,000 Discount for 2 Location Café with Absentee Owner

    With an absentee Owner and a General Manager in place at both locations, this double-location salad & sandwich café serves up soups, salads, sandwiches, and wraps for a consistent lunch crowd daily. This restaurant also bakes fresh bread, muffins, cakes, and cookies every morning. With each 4,200 sq. ft. location positioned amid shopping centers and near office buildings, the café is a perfect breakfast and lunch stop for shoppers, businesspeople, and area residents. With the Westroads Area location at $175K and the West Omaha location at $125K, a buyer will receive a $80K discount upon buying both at $220K. Assets include 2 catering vans, large ovens, mixers, walk-in coolers, restaurant equipment, furniture, and fixtures. There are 20-25 people on staff at each café location; along with the GM, there is an Assistant Manager, 1-2 Shift Supervisors, 2 baristas, 1 order taker, 1 sandwich maker, 2 salad/soup staff, 1 food runner, 2 cashiers, 1 baker, 2 bussers, 1 catering staff, 1 dish washer, and 1 food prep staff. There is also 1 bread maker and 1 bulk dough maker; all bread for both locations is baked at Westroads Area location each morning and transferred to the second store.

     Menu options include breakfast favorites such as omelets, quiche, breakfast wraps, and fresh baked muffins, cinnamon rolls, and croissants. Lunch options consist of soups, signature salads, panini & flatbread sandwiches, and wraps, all made-to-order with fresh ingredients in front of the customer. Catering and online ordering are offered, with Door Dash, GrubHub, and Uber Eats available for home delivery.

     Sales have maintained at $1.5M-$1.6M at each location in 2020; a new owner could adjust pricing to increase revenue, as well as promoting online orders and home delivery. Adding keto bread as a menu option would appeal to the growing number of low-carb and keto dieters.

     

    PRICE $220,000 CASH FLOW $70,404

  • Renowned Beverly Hills Fashion Boutique

    This high-end fashion boutique in Beverly Hills is extremely well-known in the industry and has several long-standing customers! Their product line includes the latest European trends imported directly from designers and manufacturers, catering to their clientele of refined, sophisticated women. National and International customers travel to the store to purchase entire wardrobes in one visit. A strong recurring local client base knows this boutique will have new and fresh clothing and accessories year-round. The owners travel to Milan twice per year for Fashion Week to place their orders for the upcoming season. They have been extraordinarily creative in recent months, offering to visit homes of local clients with their rolling racks, sending photos to national and international clients to choose from & shipping their items, and choosing items for long-standing clientele.

    The owners handle buying, pricing, inventory, and bookkeeping tasks. The full-time store manager/assistant buyer has been on staff for 13 years and has vast knowledge of the vendors, products, and client base. The team is rounded out by one full-time sales & display person. 

    With exclusivity on several high-end collections, the store is well-known to designers and manufacturers and has long-term relationships with many vendors. The boutique has not tapped into online sales, which would be a tremendous opportunity for revenue growth. Increasing advertising efforts and expanding their product line to include menswear would also undoubtedly add to their customer base.

    PRICE $2,100,000 CASH FLOW $533,013

  • 105-Person Capacity Bar with Kitchen

    In business for 14 years, this business has $180,000 in buildout with a capacity of 105 people! They added a cozy fenced in patio with wind protection for smokers. Equipment totals $60,000 and includes a walk-in freezer/fridge, a kitchen hood, dishwasher, and miscellaneous furniture, fixtures, and equipment. There are two full time bartenders/ servers and five part-time servers/bartenders that take care of the customers. The lease is $4,635 per month for 2,500 square feet and a new owner would only have to put forth a down payment of $40,000.

    Selling the business as a part of a planned retirement strategy, the current owner is responsible for cleaning, inventory management, vendor relations, bookkeeping, bank deposits and payroll. There are growth opportunities in advertising on social media, establishing B2B relationships with nearby businesses and other forms of low cost or free advertising.

    With continual development in the area, this bar and grill is in the prime location for success! When it comes to the developing areas in Omaha, this is one to watch.  The neighboring $200MM project will bring apartment complexes, 300,000 sq. ft. of office space and neighborhood retail and an amphitheater near this retail hot spot. Sporting a unique theme that lures in a mix of consistent locals and fresh out of town visitors, the bar hosts competitive dart leagues throughout the week, Keno and karaoke on the weekends to keep the place busy.


    PRICE $115,000

  • B2B Health & Wellness Technology & Consulting

    With a proprietary technology platform, evaluation tools, algorithms, and historical database already in place, the mission of this company is to provide health & wellness program services for corporations and small to medium-sized businesses nationwide! A full range of products and solutions are offered to clients, including numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.

     

    Most clients have a one-year contract and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.

     

    Priced at $675,000, a 10% down payment of $67,500 returns $117,005 in the first year after debt payments – a 173% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!

    PRICE $675,000 CASH FLOW $207,101

  • Omaha Childcare Center – 12k sq. ft. Facility

    With an increasing net income year after year, even in COVID-19, and with a continued high profit margin, this stand-alone childcare facility serves children from 6 weeks to 6 years and older. This childcare specializes in an all-inclusive enrichment, aiming to create a well-rounded learning experience. Investing over $13,200 in curriculum and with a curriculum specialist on staff, there are weekly learning curriculum which involves areas of STEM, music, art and social interaction, there are age appropriate so that all ages can participate.

     

    The current owner is 95% absentee and operates the business remotely with their current responsibilities only including finances and payroll. The staff of 19 employees (15FT and 4PT) includes a Director who runs the day-to-day operations, an Assistant Director, a Curriculum Director, and Teachers.

     

    Located in a 12,000 square foot free-standing building that includes an activity center, lunchroom, 8 separate classrooms, playground, multi-use area, the center is licensed for 125, and has a current attendance of 75-90 children and a capacity of 150. Title XX makes up 60% of enrollments.

     

    With an excellent reputation in the community, this full-scale daycare pulls from a variety of nearby premium schools.  Transportation to and from school is provided, and school-aged children can enroll for summer camp and attend full-day childcare on school holidays and snow days.

    PRICE $705,000 CASH FLOW $162,661

  • Omaha Childcare Center – 12k sq. ft. Facility

    With an increasing net income year after year, even in COVID-19, and with a continued high profit margin, this stand-alone childcare facility serves children from 6 weeks to 6 years and older. This childcare specializes in an all-inclusive enrichment, aiming to create a well-rounded learning experience. Investing over $13,200 in curriculum and with a curriculum specialist on staff, there are weekly learning curriculum which involves areas of STEM, music, art and social interaction, there are age appropriate so that all ages can participate.

     

    The current owner is 95% absentee and operates the business remotely with their current responsibilities only including finances and payroll. The staff of 19 employees (15FT and 4PT) includes a Director who runs the day-to-day operations, an Assistant Director, a Curriculum Director, and Teachers.

     

    Located in a 12,000 square foot free-standing building that includes an activity center, lunchroom, 8 separate classrooms, playground, multi-use area, the center is licensed for 125, and has a current attendance of 75-90 children and a capacity of 150. Title XX makes up 60% of enrollments.

     

    With an excellent reputation in the community, this full-scale daycare pulls from a variety of nearby premium schools.  Transportation to and from school is provided, and school-aged children can enroll for summer camp and attend full-day childcare on school holidays and snow days.

    PRICE $705,000 CASH FLOW $162,661

  • Southwest Omaha Nail Salon & Spa

    With over $470,000 in buildout and assets, this truly gorgeous nail salon and spa is near a highly desirable intersection with excellent visibility from passing traffic! The build-out of the space was done very well and great care was taken to provide a luxurious and upscale environment for relaxation.  Assets include valuable aesthetics, tools, equipment, appliances, and technology.  The 3,400 square feet of space features a nice reception area to welcome customers, many pedicure stations that can accommodate dry and wet services, manicure stations with proper venting for acrylic nails, and esthetic rooms that are set-up and ready for a massage therapist or esthetician.  With 11 experienced employees, current services include manicures (acrylic, dip, gel, shellac, polish), pedicures (gel, shellac, polish), and spa services (eyelashes, wax, massage, facials, etc.).  The clientele is primarily female in the 35+ age bracket; in general, they are loyal to service providers and tend to have more of a disposable income to see their technician on a regular basis.

     

    One receptionist manages the front desk, while three nail techs, four general techs, and three estheticians provide services to the customers.  Staff are contracted employees except for the receptionist.  All nail techs, general techs, and estheticians are 1099 contractors who work as needed, reducing an owner’s employee costs.

     

    Priced at $275,000, this salon is ready for continued operations.  Investment could be made in engaging on social media and boosting reviews on platforms. Expansion of esthetics services is a large area for potential growth as is the market for bridal parties, birthday celebrations, or holiday gatherings. Hiring a hair stylist would also be an opportunity for business growth, as well as offering couple massages and expanding existing hours.

    PRICE $275,000

  • French Quarter Day Spa – Popular with Tourists & Locals

    Revenue for this New Orleans day spa is back up to pre-covid numbers, with nearly $72.5k in sales in the month of May alone! All festivals have been rescheduled for October, and Mardi Gras 2022 has been approved, so those numbers will keep climbing. Located in the heart of the French Quarter, this business offers massages, facials, pedicures, manicures, and body treatments, and they have a variety of skincare and body products on hand. The experienced team includes 14 massage therapists (9 of them are W-2 employees, 5 are 1099’s), 4 estheticians, 3 nail techs, and 4 front desk personnel. Each team member is state licensed and board certified. Using top-notch ProSolutions spa software makes it easy for the 2 owners to run the business from home; it includes an appointment book, inventory controls, and client history & tracking, as well as automated marketing and unlimited reports. Priced at $670,000, a 10% down payment of $67,000 returns $106,726 in the first year after debt payments – a 159% return on investment!

     

    Within their 2,000 sq. ft. space, their furniture and equipment consists of 4 massage tables, 2 pedicure chairs, 2 manicure stations, 4 wax carts, 2 chair massage units, 2 fully furnished locker rooms, headrests, a washer & dryer, linens, robes, towels, sheets, supplies, and a wall of upscale retail products.

     

    Massages/couples’ massages are their most popular service, averaging $115 per hour. Their superior services lead to word-of-mouth advertising and a solid reputation among locals and tourists. Growth would be exponential with the addition of online retail sales and expansion of marketing and social media platforms, as well as adding services such as make-up and blow-outs.

    PRICE $670,000 CASH FLOW $206,241

  • Renowned Beverly Hills Fashion Boutique

    This high-end fashion boutique in Beverly Hills is extremely well-known in the industry and has several long-standing customers! Their product line includes the latest European trends imported directly from designers and manufacturers, catering to their clientele of refined, sophisticated women. National and International customers travel to the store to purchase entire wardrobes in one visit. A strong recurring local client base knows this boutique will have new and fresh clothing and accessories year-round. The owners travel to Milan twice per year for Fashion Week to place their orders for the upcoming season. They have been extraordinarily creative in recent months, offering to visit homes of local clients with their rolling racks, sending photos to national and international clients to choose from & shipping their items, and choosing items for long-standing clientele.

    The owners handle buying, pricing, inventory, and bookkeeping tasks. The full-time store manager/assistant buyer has been on staff for 13 years and has vast knowledge of the vendors, products, and client base. The team is rounded out by one full-time sales & display person. 

    With exclusivity on several high-end collections, the store is well-known to designers and manufacturers and has long-term relationships with many vendors. The boutique has not tapped into online sales, which would be a tremendous opportunity for revenue growth. Increasing advertising efforts and expanding their product line to include menswear would also undoubtedly add to their customer base.

    PRICE $2,100,000 CASH FLOW $533,013

  • Translating & Interpreting for Healthcare & Schools

    Priced at $510,000, a down payment of $51,000 returns $99,301 in the first year after debt payments – a 195% return on investment! Serving large health care, municipal legal, and school systems, along with commercial businesses, Social Security Administration, and individual customers, the seller of this LSP business is willing to do performance based earnout to show vested interest. Interpreting 50+ languages accounts for 85% of revenues, with translation of 150 languages accounting for the remaining 15%.  With 102 contracted employees, 75 of which are local interpreters, this business operates with low overhead, earning a 46% profit margin last year. 2020 numbers were down due to COVID-19, as 80% of their client base consists of schools and hospitals. There is complete confidence that the business will return to normal levels as establishments are re-opening. Established in 1997, many customers have been with this firm for over twenty years and have strong working relationships to draw upon. The owner remotely manages the day-to-day operations and routes the work to the team of translators. The translating duties could be distributed to a contracted employee, if desired. 

     

    Current administrative operations are completed remotely and both contracted coordinating assistants work part-time from their home.  The bank of 75 contracted interpreters are local and take assignments throughout Northeast Ohio and work in over fifty languages.  The team of 25 translators work in over 150 languages and are all remote hires. 

     

    This small but mighty team has grown their customer base and maintained a positive reputation in the area.  To build upon current successes, investment in marketing could be effective in generating new clients as could networking with local business owners. The company does not currently have a scheduling portal – a new owner who has a technology background and could implement this feature would be incredibly beneficial to the business.

    PRICE $510,000 CASH FLOW $177,567

  • Translating & Interpreting for Healthcare & Schools

    Priced at $510,000, a down payment of $51,000 returns $99,301 in the first year after debt payments – a 195% return on investment! Serving large health care, municipal legal, and school systems, along with commercial businesses, Social Security Administration, and individual customers, the seller of this LSP business is willing to do performance based earnout to show vested interest. Interpreting 50+ languages accounts for 85% of revenues, with translation of 150 languages accounting for the remaining 15%.  With 102 contracted employees, 75 of which are local interpreters, this business operates with low overhead, earning a 46% profit margin last year. 2020 numbers were down due to COVID-19, as 80% of their client base consists of schools and hospitals. There is complete confidence that the business will return to normal levels as establishments are re-opening. Established in 1997, many customers have been with this firm for over twenty years and have strong working relationships to draw upon. The owner remotely manages the day-to-day operations and routes the work to the team of translators. The translating duties could be distributed to a contracted employee, if desired. 

     

    Current administrative operations are completed remotely and both contracted coordinating assistants work part-time from their home.  The bank of 75 contracted interpreters are local and take assignments throughout Northeast Ohio and work in over fifty languages.  The team of 25 translators work in over 150 languages and are all remote hires. 

     

    This small but mighty team has grown their customer base and maintained a positive reputation in the area.  To build upon current successes, investment in marketing could be effective in generating new clients as could networking with local business owners. The company does not currently have a scheduling portal – a new owner who has a technology background and could implement this feature would be incredibly beneficial to the business.

    PRICE $510,000 CASH FLOW $177,567

Rentals/Transportation/Automotive (7)

  • Towing & Auto Repair With Over $2M in Revenue

    Generating over $2M in revenue, this Ontario-based business provides towing and recovery services for roadside companies, law enforcement agencies, municipal fleets, public vehicles, emergency vehicles, and local individuals. They also provide expert automotive repairs including brakes, steering, engine diagnostics, and heavy truck repairs. 72% of revenue is from towing services and 28% from auto repair services with $1M virtually guaranteed roadside revenues.

    The 18-person team includes 8 full-time drivers, 3 mechanics, 3 apprentices, an office manager, a dispatcher, a part-time bookkeeper, and a payroll clerk with most employees having 6+ years tenure.  The current owner commissions for towing jobs and handles high-level management functions, he is not doing any of the labor or driving. The business is well positioned to dominate the market with opportunities to expand the towing business and expand geographically into the Soo area.

    There is over $500K worth of equipment with $192K capex that would be included in the sale. The roadside and auto repair divisions have created niche segments that help protect the work and a large moat has been created by tying up the larger roadside contracts within the district. This makes it hard for other companies to get a foot hold.

    In addition, the garage has the only heavy mechanic shop within 55 km and they have multiple light and heavy licenses. Most of their revenue comes from long-term contracts with roadside service companies and referrals from local law enforcement agencies.  The largest towing customer operates on negotiated three-year contracts and they have been a loyal customer for over 21 years. Their website and word-of-mouth advertising from loyal and long-standing clientele help them obtain new clients on a regular basis.

    PRICE $2,600,000 CASH FLOW $703,792

  • Scaffolding Equipment Rental Company – over $13M in Assets

    With a three-year average cash flow of $5,457,808, this company offers top-of-the-line scaffolding equipment to a diverse customer base of 500 customers in the Twin Cities metro area! They currently have 15 recurring clients that include general contractors, concrete & masonry, demolition, and repair and installation contractors. They install, dismantle, rent, and sell frame scaffolding, system scaffolding, shoring scaffolding, and hydro mobile platforms with 59% of their revenue coming from rentals. With only $1M in capex, this business has over $13M in assets and over $3.5M in work-in-progress and backlog. They are on average 70% utilized with about $9.9M in inventory out for rentals on a monthly basis. With $3.9M in hydro mobile inventory (70 – 75 units) they are far ahead of their competitors who only have 1-3 units of a competing brand. They also offer 3D drawings on more complex projects which differentiates them in the market.

     

    This company does little to no marketing or advertising because they have recurring clients due to their top-notch customer service, delivery options and the quality of indoor and outdoor scaffolding. This business has a sister company (23% of revenue) that is Union based. Their current building space is 50,000 square feet with 3,000 square feet being the office building and 47,000 square feet of warehouse. There is also 1.2 acres yard for outside storage. 

     

    In any given month, they have around 150 work orders and their large projects that go for longer than on year are greater than $1M in value. Assets include almost $11M in scaffolding inventory and $1.6M in vehicles like trucks (5), 27-foot straight trucks, one-ton truck (1), pickups (20). Their current backlog of projects is about $3.5M and they are over $13M sales for 2020. At any given time, they have anywhere from 45 – 60 employees with 21 of them being office workers like sales representatives, office managers and the rest being laborers and contractors.

     

    Two of the owners focus primarily on sales and the third owner manages day to day business but they are currently transitioning responsibilities to other employees. Priced at $22,950,000, this is a business that is positioned to grow in the scaffolding space through acquisition of more inventory and expansion into different cities.

    PRICE $22,950,000 CASH FLOW $5,457,808

  • Railroad Terminal Logistics – Absentee Owner

     

    This rail freight and bulk transfer logistics business has 4 locations in Pennsylvania & New York supporting a very diversified customer & industry base!  This business has a 32% profit margin, over $2M in assets, and been deemed an essential business during COVID. Serving the Mid-Atlantic to Northeast region of the U.S. for over 20 years, this family of companies offers railroad terminal operation for inbound & outbound freight clients, clerical & inspection work for inbound & outbound rail freight, equipment maintenance & repair, and transloading of commodities such as frac sand, swamp mats, propane, residual waste, hazmat materials, and agricultural products. The diverse customer base consists of transportation providers, oil & gas companies, agriculture industry clients, PennDOT, the energy sector, and plastics & lumber clients. Everyone on the team of 36 highly experienced staff is cross-trained and can work at each separate entity within this company. The owner is retired and has an adult daughter who will stay on for 5+ years and continue as General Manager.

    Corporate headquarters are in Scranton; this entity supports the accounting/bookkeeping, insurance needs, and HR. There is an intermodal terminal operations company also located in Pennsylvania, and a bulk rail facility in New York that is a short line railroad and is project-oriented, handling everything from mats for pipelines, re-bar for road construction, and utility poles for the power industry. The fourth entity is a rail facility in Pennsylvania with a certified truck scale and multiple conveyers. The team is comprised of 1 Operations Manager/Communications Director, 1 VP of Business Development, 1 Controller, 1 Accounting/HR, 1 Safety Officer/Project Oversight, plus a number of day managers, night managers, mechanics, transload operators, crane operators, truck drivers, and clerical staff. Assets include 6 sand trans loaders/conveyers, 4 hostler trucks, 2 overhead gantry cranes, a vacuum lift, and a variety of heavy lifting equipment & heavy construction pieces.

    Substantial growth is inevitable for this family of companies. Expanding their service area further south, adding another fully functional terminal, increasing commodities, and looking further into increasing residual waste removal services would be tremendous and diversified.

     

    PRICE $7,750,000 CASH FLOW $1,428,816

  • Custom Trailer Manufacturing & Fabrication with 24% Profit Margin

    The average sale size for this custom trailer manufacturing business is $52,500 per trailer! Boasting a 24% profit margin in 2020, this custom trailer fabrication company serves a wide variety of clients, including rural municipalities, farming communities, road-pavers, and gravel haulers. Operating out of an 18k sq. ft. facility in Southern Saskatchewan, the highly skilled team does custom trailer engineering and fabrication,  along with trailer maintenance, refurbishing, and supplying fabricated replacement parts. Trailers include gravel, belly dump, clam shell, flat decks, and more, each with a variety of dimensions that can be customized. Refurbishing work consists of sandblasting, painting, and general welding repairs, and the company also supplies fabricated replacement parts such as stoppers, fifth wheel replacements, air cylinders, and tarps. Included in purchase price is over $313,354 worth of assets, including equipment such as band saws, jigs, a forklift, hoists, a payloader, welders, a shearer, an iron worker, a hydraulic press, trailer rotisserie stands, bench grinders, a paint system, and a Caterpillar 950 Payloader.

     

    Sales are conducted by two dealers in Canada and the owner, with most sales being done over the phone and no travel. Personnel includes four experienced employees: 1 owner, 2 full-time welders/fabricators, and 1 full-time office/shop assistant. The current owner oversees operations, conducts some sales, and assists in the shop when needed.

     

    The ability to customize dimensions for various trailer styles sets this business apart from competitors. Opportunities for growth include expanding the current website and social media presence to attract a wider range of customers. There is also an opportunity to take advantage of a more streamlined process through the Alberta government; instead of doing a bid system, the business could get on a short list to be approved to provide services/products on request. Priced at $420,000 and nearly 75% collateralized, a buyer can expect a 113% return on investment in the first year after debt payments.

    PRICE $420,000 CASH FLOW $124,517

  • Third Party Logistics, Order, Fulfillment & Manufacturing Support

    Foreign Trade Zone on premises! This third-party logistics business has been well-established in Northern California for over 35 years at eight different locations and has $52M in committed contractual revenue for 2021. Providing manufacturing support, warehousing, order fulfillment, transportation management, and customized supply chain solutions, this company has a solid foundation and relationships with government and industry organizations. The team of over 125 highly qualified and experienced personnel includes the leadership team, plus project managers, general managers, forklift operators, packers, material handlers, and warehouse managers. The current owner is retired and lives out of state. There are 2 funding options, with a higher cash a close providing at $3.5M discount.

    Manufacturing support includes raw material kitting, lean production line manufacturing, sequencing, build & test process, and vendor managed inventory. Warehousing capabilities are comprised of customized storage options, customized receiving, digital tracking, and temperature stability. The company prides itself on quality order fulfillment by providing product handling expertise, branded packaging, accurate documentation, and they use EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) software to ensure accurate order processing and fulfillment. They have extensive knowledge of packing, crating, and shipment requirements for different countries. Handling transportation needs, whether local, regional, statewide, national, or global, has been one of many ways this business has built a solid reputation. The company meets the needs of well-known high-tech clients and is in the process of expanding business into Pharma programs and specialized designated warehousing for clients.

    A few growth opportunities would be to expand pharmaceutical accounts, more fully utilize the foreign trade zone on premises, cover more needs of current clients, and develop more dedicated specific warehousing for specific clients.

    PRICE $26,000,000 CASH FLOW $5,977,658

  • Auto Repair, Body Shop & Towing in Fairfield County

     

    This business has an experienced team of 10 employees, including 2 managers! Located in Connecticut and established for nearly 25 years, this auto shop has four main revenue streams: repair, towing, auto sales, and body repair.  Body shop work accounts for 60% of annual revenues, with mechanical repairs earning 30%, and towing and car sales the remaining 10%.  The shop features eight bays with plenty of room to meet current customer needs as well as room to grow without modifications to the current space.  Social media reviews are excellent and show a dedicated and satisfied customer base as well as the development of a continued trust.  The owner currently oversees financial management.  Oversight of daily operations is done in partnership with the two shop managers.  Seven technicians, 1 mechanical manager, 1 body shop manager, and one driver round out this well-trained team. 

     

    The building is 4,500 square feet with a large paved lot in the front and the rear of the shop.   The back lot is secured with fencing, an alarm system, and other security features.  There are eight vehicle bays for repair work as well as a waiting area, restrooms, and a private office for the owner.  Also included is a 600 square foot paint booth located just outside the main building. 

     

    Business has been growing year-over-year but continued additional revenues could be found in any of the of four service areas.  Both the body shop and mechanical repair division have room for additional capacity, while the auto sales can increase as desired.  The greatest potential for increased income is to focus on building towing business. 


    PRICE $705,000 CASH FLOW $233,100

  • Concrete Pumping & Maintenance with 90% Recurring Client Base

    With a 90% recurring client base, this growing concrete business has 4 locations, 36 concrete pumps, over $10M in hard assets, and 57 employees in Southern California and Texas. The bulk of its contracts are municipal projects, such as K-12 Schools, Universities, Hospitals, and Government Agencies. With its specialized equipment and experienced teams, this business is able to take on projects that would be too large or too difficult for other contractors. The company’s customers are loyal, and since larger public projects and public works are rarely affected by economic changes, the business has been able to weather economic changes and continue to grow while other contractors have failed.

     

    The business boasts over $10M in hard assets and equipment, including 36 concrete pumps, making them one of the largest concrete companies in the nation. Moreover, the current owners have been efficient in their operations and have focused on sustainable and responsible growth. The owners approach this in two important ways: (1) They purchase all new equipment without incurring any long-term debt, and (2) The owners import their replacement parts from producers and wholesalers worldwide, which allows them to save 30-45% off what their competitors have to pay. Using these approaches, the company has over $2M in accounts receivable and ongoing work, and typically over 90% of AR is paid within 90 days. All this while remaining DEBT FREE!

     

    Well-trained managers and project leads are in place and the supporting administrative staff is knowledgeable and capable to handle day-to-day operations. A lot of new equipment was purchased in 2016 & 2017; generally, CapEx is less than $150,000/year.

     

    The owner is involved in daily operations as a manager and in an oversight capacity, and he is willing to stay on as president for 3-4 years. This is an excellent opportunity for any buyer, regardless of construction experience, as Seller will give you all the tools to succeed. Truly a turnkey business opportunity.

    PRICE $17,500,000 CASH FLOW $2,367,719

  • B2B Health & Wellness Technology & Consulting

    With a proprietary technology platform, evaluation tools, algorithms, and historical database already in place, the mission of this company is to provide health & wellness program services for corporations and small to medium-sized businesses nationwide! A full range of products and solutions are offered to clients, including numerous health-related assessments complete with personal and aggregate reporting, algorithms for scoring, scientific documents, historical documents, behavior change tools, consulting tools, and consulting templates. The company works directly with employers, as well as through vendors (other companies who have similar services) and insurance brokers who are working with organizations on benefits packages. The owner handles some sales, as well as client relations and general oversight of company operations. There is 1 full-time W2 employee who runs the day-to-day operations of the business; the rest of the staff is subcontracted out. This includes a full-service IT team, along with a graphic designer, a bookkeeper, an accountant, a salesperson, and other subs as needed.

     

    Most clients have a one-year contract and a large portion are recurring, with 100% of 2020 clients signing a renewal. Monthly fees bring in recurring monthly revenue, averaging between $20k-$35k per month.  The company also has 5 different resellers, who act as passive sellers of the products. The proprietary platform is set up for this – an organization can purchase the assessments and then market/resell the assessments on their behalf. The business has had 75+ companies on their platform over the years – many of these came from their resellers. Increasing the number of resellers would be a huge opportunity for revenue growth.

     

    Priced at $675,000, a 10% down payment of $67,500 returns $117,005 in the first year after debt payments – a 173% return on investment. With their sizable database already in place, along with the technology platform & scientific foundation, a new owner could take this company to the next level. This would be an excellent strategic partnership opportunity for an existing health & wellness company!

    PRICE $675,000 CASH FLOW $207,101

  • Omaha Childcare Center – 12k sq. ft. Facility

    With an increasing net income year after year, even in COVID-19, and with a continued high profit margin, this stand-alone childcare facility serves children from 6 weeks to 6 years and older. This childcare specializes in an all-inclusive enrichment, aiming to create a well-rounded learning experience. Investing over $13,200 in curriculum and with a curriculum specialist on staff, there are weekly learning curriculum which involves areas of STEM, music, art and social interaction, there are age appropriate so that all ages can participate.

     

    The current owner is 95% absentee and operates the business remotely with their current responsibilities only including finances and payroll. The staff of 19 employees (15FT and 4PT) includes a Director who runs the day-to-day operations, an Assistant Director, a Curriculum Director, and Teachers.

     

    Located in a 12,000 square foot free-standing building that includes an activity center, lunchroom, 8 separate classrooms, playground, multi-use area, the center is licensed for 125, and has a current attendance of 75-90 children and a capacity of 150. Title XX makes up 60% of enrollments.

     

    With an excellent reputation in the community, this full-scale daycare pulls from a variety of nearby premium schools.  Transportation to and from school is provided, and school-aged children can enroll for summer camp and attend full-day childcare on school holidays and snow days.

    PRICE $705,000 CASH FLOW $162,661

  • Southwest Omaha Nail Salon & Spa

    With over $470,000 in buildout and assets, this truly gorgeous nail salon and spa is near a highly desirable intersection with excellent visibility from passing traffic! The build-out of the space was done very well and great care was taken to provide a luxurious and upscale environment for relaxation.  Assets include valuable aesthetics, tools, equipment, appliances, and technology.  The 3,400 square feet of space features a nice reception area to welcome customers, many pedicure stations that can accommodate dry and wet services, manicure stations with proper venting for acrylic nails, and esthetic rooms that are set-up and ready for a massage therapist or esthetician.  With 11 experienced employees, current services include manicures (acrylic, dip, gel, shellac, polish), pedicures (gel, shellac, polish), and spa services (eyelashes, wax, massage, facials, etc.).  The clientele is primarily female in the 35+ age bracket; in general, they are loyal to service providers and tend to have more of a disposable income to see their technician on a regular basis.

     

    One receptionist manages the front desk, while three nail techs, four general techs, and three estheticians provide services to the customers.  Staff are contracted employees except for the receptionist.  All nail techs, general techs, and estheticians are 1099 contractors who work as needed, reducing an owner’s employee costs.

     

    Priced at $275,000, this salon is ready for continued operations.  Investment could be made in engaging on social media and boosting reviews on platforms. Expansion of esthetics services is a large area for potential growth as is the market for bridal parties, birthday celebrations, or holiday gatherings. Hiring a hair stylist would also be an opportunity for business growth, as well as offering couple massages and expanding existing hours.

    PRICE $275,000

  • French Quarter Day Spa – Popular with Tourists & Locals

    Revenue for this New Orleans day spa is back up to pre-covid numbers, with nearly $72.5k in sales in the month of May alone! All festivals have been rescheduled for October, and Mardi Gras 2022 has been approved, so those numbers will keep climbing. Located in the heart of the French Quarter, this business offers massages, facials, pedicures, manicures, and body treatments, and they have a variety of skincare and body products on hand. The experienced team includes 14 massage therapists (9 of them are W-2 employees, 5 are 1099’s), 4 estheticians, 3 nail techs, and 4 front desk personnel. Each team member is state licensed and board certified. Using top-notch ProSolutions spa software makes it easy for the 2 owners to run the business from home; it includes an appointment book, inventory controls, and client history & tracking, as well as automated marketing and unlimited reports. Priced at $670,000, a 10% down payment of $67,000 returns $106,726 in the first year after debt payments – a 159% return on investment!

     

    Within their 2,000 sq. ft. space, their furniture and equipment consists of 4 massage tables, 2 pedicure chairs, 2 manicure stations, 4 wax carts, 2 chair massage units, 2 fully furnished locker rooms, headrests, a washer & dryer, linens, robes, towels, sheets, supplies, and a wall of upscale retail products.

     

    Massages/couples’ massages are their most popular service, averaging $115 per hour. Their superior services lead to word-of-mouth advertising and a solid reputation among locals and tourists. Growth would be exponential with the addition of online retail sales and expansion of marketing and social media platforms, as well as adding services such as make-up and blow-outs.

    PRICE $670,000 CASH FLOW $206,241

  • Renowned Beverly Hills Fashion Boutique

    This high-end fashion boutique in Beverly Hills is extremely well-known in the industry and has several long-standing customers! Their product line includes the latest European trends imported directly from designers and manufacturers, catering to their clientele of refined, sophisticated women. National and International customers travel to the store to purchase entire wardrobes in one visit. A strong recurring local client base knows this boutique will have new and fresh clothing and accessories year-round. The owners travel to Milan twice per year for Fashion Week to place their orders for the upcoming season. They have been extraordinarily creative in recent months, offering to visit homes of local clients with their rolling racks, sending photos to national and international clients to choose from & shipping their items, and choosing items for long-standing clientele.

    The owners handle buying, pricing, inventory, and bookkeeping tasks. The full-time store manager/assistant buyer has been on staff for 13 years and has vast knowledge of the vendors, products, and client base. The team is rounded out by one full-time sales & display person. 

    With exclusivity on several high-end collections, the store is well-known to designers and manufacturers and has long-term relationships with many vendors. The boutique has not tapped into online sales, which would be a tremendous opportunity for revenue growth. Increasing advertising efforts and expanding their product line to include menswear would also undoubtedly add to their customer base.

    PRICE $2,100,000 CASH FLOW $533,013

  • Translating & Interpreting for Healthcare & Schools

    Priced at $510,000, a down payment of $51,000 returns $99,301 in the first year after debt payments – a 195% return on investment! Serving large health care, municipal legal, and school systems, along with commercial businesses, Social Security Administration, and individual customers, the seller of this LSP business is willing to do performance based earnout to show vested interest. Interpreting 50+ languages accounts for 85% of revenues, with translation of 150 languages accounting for the remaining 15%.  With 102 contracted employees, 75 of which are local interpreters, this business operates with low overhead, earning a 46% profit margin last year. 2020 numbers were down due to COVID-19, as 80% of their client base consists of schools and hospitals. There is complete confidence that the business will return to normal levels as establishments are re-opening. Established in 1997, many customers have been with this firm for over twenty years and have strong working relationships to draw upon. The owner remotely manages the day-to-day operations and routes the work to the team of translators. The translating duties could be distributed to a contracted employee, if desired. 

     

    Current administrative operations are completed remotely and both contracted coordinating assistants work part-time from their home.  The bank of 75 contracted interpreters are local and take assignments throughout Northeast Ohio and work in over fifty languages.  The team of 25 translators work in over 150 languages and are all remote hires. 

     

    This small but mighty team has grown their customer base and maintained a positive reputation in the area.  To build upon current successes, investment in marketing could be effective in generating new clients as could networking with local business owners. The company does not currently have a scheduling portal – a new owner who has a technology background and could implement this feature would be incredibly beneficial to the business.

    PRICE $510,000 CASH FLOW $177,567

  • Amazon E-Commerce Dropship Vendor w/ $1.2M Cashflow

    This dropship vendor provides necessary janitorial, PPE, and office supplies through Amazon and other marketplaces! Using Channel Advisor software, which can manage up to 1 million SKUs, this business manages over 400,000 products with 20+ vendors, and resells on their website and marketplaces. They currently do no marketing or advertising.

    Every order placed online is drop-shipped directly from the wholesaler or manufacturer in 2-3 business days to the consumer/business – they carry little to no inventory and have almost no overhead. With an integrated ordering system already in place, their software is ideal for the high volume of products this company sells.

    • They continue to add 2-3 vendors per year, each providing a greater variety of products.  Recently, they were awarded a contract to sell office supplies to a network of over 250 hospitals and 350,000 shipping locations nationwide, including doctors’ offices.
    • 95% of revenue comes from large name marketplace retailers, while 5% comes directly from the website.
    • 75% of website sales come from the consumer and 25% from business accounts.
    • Their website is highly secure with the Green Address Bar SSL Certificate (highest in Industry standard, equal to bank standard) and is tested daily to ensure its durability.
    • Providing quality products at a low price, the product mark-up is between 28-48%. Excellent relationships with the wholesalers help them deliver their low-price guarantee, as well as superb customer service.
    •  A small storage facility in the Southeast, US is currently used to handle returns to the wholesalers.
    This company priced at $3,025,000 is positioned to grow and expand in the online retail space. They are qualified for Amazon Seller Prime, but not currently using it – taking advantage of this qualification would lead to a substantial increase in traffic and revenue. Securing additional contracts directly with hospitals and corporations would also boost sales.

    PRICE $3,025,000 CASH FLOW $1,151,411

  • Professional & Clerical Staffing Services in Rhode Island

    Well-established for over 17 years, this full-service staffing firm has several long-term client relationships in place! Providing staffing for temporary, temp-to-hire, and direct hire placements in the state of Rhode Island, clients include a variety of businesses and corporations, large and small. The team consists of 2 FT employees (the owner and 1 Staffing Specialist), as well as 1 on-call Staffing Coordinator and 55-60 temp employees on assignment as needed. Placements range from part-time, short-term positions to long-term opportunities. Several of their placements have remained in those positions for 10-15 years. Currently, they are receiving 5-10 new orders on a weekly basis. Their placement process can take anywhere from 2 weeks to 2 months, depending on the needs of the client. Well-respected in their community and known for providing exceptional service and always being accessible to their clients, this staffing firm is in a prime position for growth under new ownership.

     

    Certified as a Rhode Island WBE/DBE, many national firms contact this company to partner with them; one such healthcare company was awarded a bid to set up a contact center in Rhode Island and develop the healthcare program for the state. Partnering with this staffing firm resulted in direct hire business for the VP of Human Resources, Business Analysts, Business Consultants, Instructional Designer, and recruiting personnel including skill assessments and language assessments.

     

    Priced at $1,426,000 a 12.5% down payment of $178,250 returns $208,500 in the first year after debt payments – a 117% return on investment! This business already has a solid reputation in place and the majority of new business comes from word-of-mouth referrals. Creating an internet presence with a website and social media accounts would certainly expand the client base and increase revenue.

    PRICE $1,426,000 CASH FLOW $390,861

  • Online Medical Equipment: 100% Dropship

    This completely remote internet-enabled, multi-channel distributor of medical, surgical and therapy supplies and equipment provides over 40,000 discounted medical supplies and was established in 1989. As a pioneer in online medical supplies, this 100% drop shipper runs on thin margins to provide services to all, with 80% of the business serving consumers (e-commerce) and the other 20% serving businesses. By ordering medical supplies in advance, users and organizations, including nursing homes and assisted living facilities, can bring in cost efficiencies. As a BBB accredited business with A+ rating, they are able to keep their prices low by being an online company and not having the added expense of a retail store.

    This company never sees the product but is simply the middleman between manufacturers/suppliers and the consumer. Therefore, no lease is needed, and the owner can run the company from any location. The current owner is thinking about retirement but is wanting to stay with the company for as long as needed to continue to work and aid in the transition.

    COVID-19 has brought in new opportunities such as wholesale and brokering. These areas can continue to be expanded on to further increase sales and profit margins. Their current relationship with manufacturers and suppliers as well as their reputation in customer service has allowed the company to continue in their success and provide low-cost new quality products.

    At the purchase price of $1,075,000, a 10% down payment of $102,800 returns $179,811 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 167% return on investment.

    PRICE $1,075,000 CASH FLOW $318,434

  • Contract Manufacturer of Corporate & Collegiate Headwear, Bags, & Apparel

    With nearly $60M in sales in 2020, this contract manufacturing company has a full management staff already in place! Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production/manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already established, they have been able to solidify themselves in the market, acting as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors.

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days.

    Priced at $15,900,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $15,900,000 CASH FLOW $4,161,997

  • In-Home Health Care in Southeast Iowa

    This private and locally owned home health care agency is 95% referral based and has a 5-star Medicare rating! They provide a variety of in-home care services like hygiene assistance, diet monitoring, housekeeping, errands, caring companionship, respite care, chronic and acute medical problems, post-surgical, and physical and speech therapy. Serving patients from pediatric to geriatric, this company is certified by the State of Iowa for Medicare and Medicaid and their 5-star Medicare rating proves excellence from member satisfaction surveys, plans, and health care providers. With the current owner involved in 1% of the business operations and administrative work, the administrator handles the majority the operations. The company has 28 qualified and trained personnel with a full-time business administrator, office manager, office assistant, and clinical manager, along with 2 full-time field nurses, 5 full-time home health aides, and 12 full-time W2 independent therapists. They also have a part-time care manager and field nurse with 3 part-time home health aides.

     

    Serving 9 counties in Southeast Iowa, this company provides coverage for workman's comp claims and private pay and, for a client’s convenience, directly bill to their insurance company. They provide a safe, compassionate, innovative health care community that listens, learns, and responds collaboratively with patients, while maintaining a culture of care.

     

    This business currently does not have active marketing, due to the already high capacity of patient care. A new owner could expand the service area and increase clientele with marketing and the hiring of more staff. There is also growth in the private sector. It is an area that is quite profitable when utilized correctly as there are no Medicare, CHAP, Medicaid rules and regulations to follow. This is for non-skilled services or contracted services. This decreases the overhead and workload for the nurses and office.At the price of $248,000, a 10% down payment of $24,800 returns $48,986 in the first year after debt payments resulting in a 198% return on investment!

    PRICE $248,000 CASH FLOW $80,966

  • Medical Equipment Renter with 1,800+ Patients

    With 18 qualified and knowledgeable employees, this home medical and respiratory equipment provider has been established for more than 50 years! Personnel includes 8 full-time and 10 part-time employees in customer service, billing, delivery, and respiratory; they qualify patients to receive equipment and products that will be covered by the client’s insurance plan. This company provides guidance to clinicians and other professional healthcare workers on how to request equipment and services for patients. With over $600,000 in assets and a 15% profit margin, sales and cash flow grew in 2020 even amidst COVID-19. This company’s primary value proposition is that they help patients and their families navigate the complex health care environment and obtain medical equipment and supplies. They currently have 1,800+ patients with equipment on rent; rental income is approximately 72% of monthly revenue. They have long term relationships with the medical community and are a preferred provider for the country of Santa Clara Health System.

     

    With limited marketing, clients come in from referrals, insurance, and contracting. Some areas of growth include implementing integrated web commerce and telephony systems and home fill oxygen solution for portable tanks, bring billing process in house or negotiate better rates for outsourced billing, expand wound vacuum referrals and lymphedema therapy referrals, and explore telemedicine remote monitoring services for Medicare patients.

     

    The two owners are planning for retirement and have set no specific time frame for involvement but anticipate some form of personal service agreements and/or W2 employment for undetermined length of time after the transaction. They want a successful transition to ensure clients remain with the company long term.

    PRICE $1,650,000 CASH FLOW $432,448

  • French Quarter Day Spa – Popular with Tourists & Locals

    Revenue for this New Orleans day spa is back up to pre-covid numbers, with nearly $72.5k in sales in the month of May alone! All festivals have been rescheduled for October, and Mardi Gras 2022 has been approved, so those numbers will keep climbing. Located in the heart of the French Quarter, this business offers massages, facials, pedicures, manicures, and body treatments, and they have a variety of skincare and body products on hand. The experienced team includes 14 massage therapists (9 of them are W-2 employees, 5 are 1099’s), 4 estheticians, 3 nail techs, and 4 front desk personnel. Each team member is state licensed and board certified. Using top-notch ProSolutions spa software makes it easy for the 2 owners to run the business from home; it includes an appointment book, inventory controls, and client history & tracking, as well as automated marketing and unlimited reports. Priced at $670,000, a 10% down payment of $67,000 returns $106,726 in the first year after debt payments – a 159% return on investment!

     

    Within their 2,000 sq. ft. space, their furniture and equipment consists of 4 massage tables, 2 pedicure chairs, 2 manicure stations, 4 wax carts, 2 chair massage units, 2 fully furnished locker rooms, headrests, a washer & dryer, linens, robes, towels, sheets, supplies, and a wall of upscale retail products.

     

    Massages/couples’ massages are their most popular service, averaging $115 per hour. Their superior services lead to word-of-mouth advertising and a solid reputation among locals and tourists. Growth would be exponential with the addition of online retail sales and expansion of marketing and social media platforms, as well as adding services such as make-up and blow-outs.

    PRICE $670,000 CASH FLOW $206,241

  • Home Remodels & Renovations with 23% Profit Margin

    Using top-of-the-line Matterport 3D camera and software system, this remodeling & renovation company has consistent profit margins over 20%!  The technology employed by the business is extremely valuable in the restoration world, as it cuts down on estimating time by 50%-60%. The population is booming in this Western North Carolina region, keeping demand incredibly high for home remodeling & renovation projects. Established for 20 years, this business specializes in renovations, reconstruction, kitchen/bath remodels, and additions, with a client base consisting primarily of residential customers (90%).  The highly skilled team includes the owner, who handles sales, estimating, and client relations, as well as a Superintendent of Operations and Carpenter, with a loyal base of 18-20 go-to subcontractors. Based out of a leased 1,200 sq. ft. facility in Buncombe County, all business is done locally within a 1-hour radius of the warehouse. Assets include every piece of equipment necessary to take on a remodel project or custom home building, a fully-equipped box truck, Ford F-250, Ford F-550, and a 6x12 open trailer.

     

    They have a solid marketing strategy already in place, using an SEO campaign run by Wordjack Media through Facebook, Google Ads, and their own well-established website. The company prides itself on personal service, communication, attention to detail, and professionalism; their solid name and reputation leads to word-of-mouth referrals in the community.

     

    Construction workers have been deemed essential, and with the drop in interest rates for construction loans & home loans, this company has plenty of work on the horizon with no end in sight. Priced at $1,095,000, it would be an excellent roll-up opportunity for an existing restoration company because of the knowledge and skill already in place. The current owner will stay on for 1-2 years to ensure a smooth transition and to see all current projects in the pipeline completed. The largest growth opportunities are in branching out more into custom homes, spec homes, and insurance work. With the right capital behind the company, revenue could triple in the next 2 years. A 12.5% down payment of $136,875 returns $176,914 in the first year after debt payments – a 129% return on investment.

    PRICE $1,095,000 CASH FLOW $347,276

  • Stone & Tile Cleaning, Sealing, and Polishing Services in Phoenix

    This business has over 1,600 active clients in the Phoenix Metro and low overhead costs! Established in 2013, this full-service stone cleaning, honing, polishing, and repair company has $115K in assets including 2 vans equipped with truck mounted hot water extraction equipment, high-speed weighted buffers, tools, and supplies. Two efficient technicians manage the entire on-site workload which involves cleaning, sealing, polishing, honing, stripping, repair, and treatment for all-natural stones as well as tile and carpet cleaning. The staff also includes a manager, an administrator/salesperson, and an overseer of the financials. All work is done for high-end homeowners, commercial businesses, hotels, banks, condominiums, or anyone with natural stone surfaces within the Phoenix Metro area. 

     

    The business operates from one warehouse that is not open to the public. They do utilize a virtual office when it is needed, but operations can be run remotely with ease. The team may be lean but is incredibly effective in running the business day-to-day. The owner currently handles scheduling and operations.

     

    This business has superior social media reviews, an excellent reputation, high quality services, and a well-trained team in place. Revenue growth would certainly be obtained by advertising, infusing capital into an additional van to increase capacity, or maximizing current assets with extended hours to generate additional income. Priced at $615,000, a 10% down payment of $61,500 returns $107,139 in the first year after debt payments – a 174% return on investment!

    PRICE $615,000 CASH FLOW $214,197

  • 32% Profit Margin - Commercial Surveillance Systems Installation

     

    This surveillance system installation company serves primarily commercial clients – apartment complexes, HOA’s, hotels, strip malls, restaurants, and hospitals! At a down payment of only 10%, a new owner would only be responsible for general oversight as the current owner lives out of the country 4 months of the year. Demand for surveillance systems is high in San Francisco – 51% of retail storefronts are currently unoccupied due to the pandemic, which means they want and need security and surveillance. With many opportunities for growth, a new owner could increase installation of temperature scanning cameras and video monitoring, expand to vertical markets (fire alarm installation, smart home systems, etc.), and add government & municipal contracts to further sales growth. Recently, this business has expanded services to add thermal monitoring for COVID. The company is focusing on recurring monthly revenue, which currently covers payroll expenses, prompting them to look for more service-based contracts, making sure each system has proper maintenance.

     

    They are increasing installation of temperature scanning cameras and video monitoring, expanding to vertical markets (fire alarm installation, smart home systems, etc.) and adding government and municipal contracts would be perfect opportunities for revenue growth.

    • Boasting a 32% profit margin already in 2021, they are well-known in Northern California
    • 80% of sales is in the San Francisco Bay area, 15% regionally, and 5% of their business is nationwide.
    • Highly experienced team with everyone on the team having a 4+ year tenure
    • Uses advanced tech like secure wireless camera networks, license plate capturing cameras and Point of Sale surveillance systems

    The owner currently handles general oversight of the business and lives out of the country 4 months out of the year. The team is standardizing their service contracts to include both remote support and hands-on support, with an obvious preference for services they can provide remotely. Their camera systems offer real-time surveillance and video monitoring to ensure real-time protection.

    PRICE $448,000 CASH FLOW $184,994

  • Professional Cleaning, Painting & Handyman Services – 1,000 Active Clients

    The client base for this business primarily consists of homeowners and realtors – the owner does no labor! Offering handyman-type services since 2013, this company in Northeast Virginia has been considered a one-stop shop in the area for the last 8 years. Working 35% in residential cleaning, 30% handyman, 25% painting solutions, and 10% miscellaneous, this business offers an extensive variety of services. Selling at a low 3.01 multiple and with a 27% profit margin, there has been consistent year over year growth in revenue and profit.  There are over 1,000 active clients in the company’s system, and they are generally adding at least one new customer each day.  These clients are able to book what they feel best fits their needs, with options for weekly, biweekly, twice weekly, monthly, or a one-time service. The team consist of 5 full-time employees with 1099’s used as needed; the current owner handles management, scheduling, and hiring, but does not do labor.

     

    The business is being run from the owners’ home, so there is very low overhead in the business, allowing for over 30% profit margin year after year.  The service area is generally kept within 40 miles from the home, but they do extend a bit past that if needed for a job.  They work regularly with over a dozen realtors, who employ them for whatever jobs are needed at the time.

     

    Priced at $1,025,000, a 12.5% down payment of $128,125 returns $208,521 in the first year after debt payments, resulting in a 162% return on investment. Growth opportunities include adding flooring and remodeling services and expanding the area of service.  They are not actively seeking new clients either, just using social media for marketing, so being more active on sales or setting up contracts with realtors would be a great move as well. The owners have chosen to take their lives in another direction, but they have done their best to set this company up for easy takeover!

    PRICE $1,025,000 CASH FLOW $361,127

  • Dog Boarding, Grooming, and Training in Northeast Virginia

    With a 2,000 sq. ft. main building & 1,600 sq. ft. indoor training facility, this company has a capacity of 50 dogs for boarding (10 cats) and 100 dogs for daycare, so there is great potential for growth all within the fence line! At a 24% profit margin, the dogs that stay in this pet complex can sleep, eat, and train all on the spacious property, playing and learning in the great outdoors. Daycare includes romps around the play field and sunbathing while training services feature obedience, scent work, puppy classes, as well as agility, rally, and more. Boarding is charged per night, while training is charged by the class. The owner currently oversees administrative tasks as well as acting as a lead trainer.  The owner is willing to remain a part of the team as a trainer, if desired. 

     

    The complex features a 2,000 square foot main building that contains the office, grooming facility, and boarding areas. There is an additional 1,600 square foot indoor training facility for obedience classes.   The wide-open acres of the property allow the dogs to run, romp, and tussle in the sun and in the snow.  The space also allows for unique training opportunities such as agility and scent work.

     

    Priced at $230,000, a 10% down payment of $23,000 returns $48,680 in the first year after debt payments – a 212% return on investment! This business features an incredible location for the services that they offer.  Working to capitalize on the unique space as well as the incorporated training options could be an area of focus for growth.  Targeted advertising may get the company in front of new clients and engagement on social media may generate excitement.

    PRICE $230,000 CASH FLOW $90,871

Retail/Home goods (8)

  • $80,000 Discount for 2 Location Café with Absentee Owner

    With an absentee Owner and a General Manager in place at both locations, this double-location salad & sandwich café serves up soups, salads, sandwiches, and wraps for a consistent lunch crowd daily. This restaurant also bakes fresh bread, muffins, cakes, and cookies every morning. With each 4,200 sq. ft. location positioned amid shopping centers and near office buildings, the café is a perfect breakfast and lunch stop for shoppers, businesspeople, and area residents. With the Westroads Area location at $175K and the West Omaha location at $125K, a buyer will receive a $80K discount upon buying both at $220K. Assets include 2 catering vans, large ovens, mixers, walk-in coolers, restaurant equipment, furniture, and fixtures. There are 20-25 people on staff at each café location; along with the GM, there is an Assistant Manager, 1-2 Shift Supervisors, 2 baristas, 1 order taker, 1 sandwich maker, 2 salad/soup staff, 1 food runner, 2 cashiers, 1 baker, 2 bussers, 1 catering staff, 1 dish washer, and 1 food prep staff. There is also 1 bread maker and 1 bulk dough maker; all bread for both locations is baked at Westroads Area location each morning and transferred to the second store.

     Menu options include breakfast favorites such as omelets, quiche, breakfast wraps, and fresh baked muffins, cinnamon rolls, and croissants. Lunch options consist of soups, signature salads, panini & flatbread sandwiches, and wraps, all made-to-order with fresh ingredients in front of the customer. Catering and online ordering are offered, with Door Dash, GrubHub, and Uber Eats available for home delivery.

     Sales have maintained at $1.5M-$1.6M at each location in 2020; a new owner could adjust pricing to increase revenue, as well as promoting online orders and home delivery. Adding keto bread as a menu option would appeal to the growing number of low-carb and keto dieters.

     

    PRICE $220,000 CASH FLOW $70,404

  • Fixture Building & Install for Retail Stores & Pharmacies

    With 100% commercial clients, this fixture installation business has seen year-over-year growth since 2017! Established for more than 15 years, this business specializes in building and installing fixtures and interior signage for commercial clients. Their highly skilled and experienced team of 20 employees, including managers, crew leads, and crew workers, is known for completing projects in a professional and efficient manner. Each area manager has their own specialty, but they are all cross-trained. Clients provide blueprints and materials; no inventory is needed on hand. Included in this purchase is $85K worth of assets including tools such as chop saws, table saws, and other equipment. Clients include big & small retailers, as well as pharmacies, clinics, pet hospitals, and warehouses.

     

    Primarily serving the East Coast states, this business provides retail store fixture installation, pharmacy fixture installation, customizations and modifications during the installation process, and quality inventory management to ensure their clients get the results they want. They also provide store remodeling, closing and relocation services.

     

    The current owner handles general oversight, sales, and invoicing. Increasing marketing efforts or hiring a direct sales staff would provide growth for the business, as well as offering external signage, lighting work, or residential work. As 2020 was an anomaly year, the business was valued using their 2019 cash flow. Priced at $795,000, this company has substantial growth opportunities. A 10% down payment of $79,500 returns $194,409 in the first year after debt payments – a 245% return on investment!

    PRICE $795,000 CASH FLOW $226,925

  • Commercial Tile Contractor with 30% Profit Margin

    All labor is outsourced for this commercial tile installation company, keeping fixed cost on labor and overhead incredibly low! Clients include General Contractors and Construction Managers, and currently the work is primarily for service stations throughout Texas. There is one part-time W2 employee (the owner’s spouse), who works approximately 10 hours/week from a home office doing estimates, purchasing, coordinating deliveries, scheduling installations with the labor force, and bookkeeping; all labor is subcontracted out. Sales could easily climb into the $2M-$3M range by actively submitting more bids, expanding the product line to include other types of flooring, pursuing work in schools, grocery stores, retail stores, and entertainment/restaurants, and by tapping into the residential market. Service station tile contracts generally run anywhere from $20k-$120k. The company currently has 10 projects on the books worth approximately $238k; the average project takes 7 days to complete.

     

    This business is not consumer-based, so there was no COVID impact on sales – clients did not put a moratorium on construction projects. The company does advertise in the Blue Book, which gives them requests for bids via email – they currently have nearly 20 open bids, along with the 8 projects in progress.

     

    Priced at $720,000, a 10% down payment of $72,000 returns $120,857 in the first year after debt payments – a 168% return on investment! With long-standing relationships already in place with General Contractors in the area, a new owner could take this business to the next level.  The current owner bought the business in 2015, when sales were $250k and grew revenue to $3.5M by 2018, with at least 5 bids per day and a much larger client base, proving that this business is capable of tremendous growth. They intentionally downsized the business in early 2019 (semi-retirement) and chose to keep sales in the $600k-$700k range. The company has seen sales in $3M range in the past and could easily reach those heights again under new ownership.

    PRICE $720,000 CASH FLOW $213,702

  • Contract Manufacturer of Corporate & Collegiate Headwear, Bags, & Apparel

    With nearly $60M in sales in 2020, this contract manufacturing company has a full management staff already in place! Their Des Moines, Iowa office handles all sales, design, and order management; their office in Vietnam is used solely for the production/manufacturing side of the business. The U.S. team of 32 is spread among several departments, including Design & Graphics, Marketing & Graphics, Web Development, Order Admin, Warehouse, Logistics, Accounting, HR, and Sales & Customer Service. The full-time team of 85 employees in Vietnam includes a Manager for each of their Cap, Bag, and Garment Departments, along with merchandisers, embroidery & graphic staff, Quality Control, pattern makers, design techs, accounting, warehouse, sourcing & procurement, and logistics personnel. Using a proprietary web platform to process and track all projects, this company’s client base consists primarily of corporate identity and specialty product distributors. With their own brand already established, they have been able to solidify themselves in the market, acting as an official outfitter/sponsor for clients. They are currently licensed with 18 colleges/universities in the U.S., enabling them to manufacture their brand with the university’s logo. This portion of the business accounts for approximately 10% of their revenue, while the other 90% is essentially through large specialty product distributors.

    The design team in the US office works with each client to customize their order based on their specific requests. They create an image and load it into their proprietary website program, at which point the Vietnam team creates the sample and the US team makes sure it meets the customer’s requests. The order then moves on to the production phase in Vietnam; the logistics teams from both offices coordinate the shipping phase (by air or by sea) and makes sure the product goes to the correct port and is distributed to the customer in a timely manner. The average length of time from an order being placed to being delivered is 55-65 days.

    Priced at $15,900,000, this company has the potential to grow ten-fold. A buyer already in logistics and/or manufacturing could expand what they are already doing. The brand is already established, so a buyer with marketing knowledge and abilities could expand that brand within their own customer base and truly take this business to the next level.

    PRICE $15,900,000 CASH FLOW $4,161,997

  • Audiology Clinic with 56% Profit Margin

    With long-existing nursing home and veteran contracts, this audiology clinic has had over 200+ clients in the last five years! Since the inception of the company in 1993, they have seen close to 1,000 different patients. The clinic saw a 56% profit margin in 2020, with two different offices in West Point and Fremont, Nebraska. This company provides audiology and hearing aid services for all ages including comprehensive hearing evaluations, hearing aid consultations and fittings, and special diagnostic tests. The current owner is the audiologist, providing all patient services. Alongside the owner is one full-time employee, the office manager, who handles all communication with patients, dedicates reports, troubleshoots, and recommends hearing items for patients, and works with insurance companies for claim submissions. They serve up to a 100-mile radius of West Point, with the audiologist/owner traveling a few times a week to provide services in nursing homes and to veterans.

     

    The West Point location is a 1,000 square feet stand-alone building specifically built for a medical clinic and is owned by the owner. The office is open Monday through Friday from 9:00am-5:00pm by appointment and walk-in. The Fremont location is a single 10x12 foot office in a shared office building with the current lease is being $300/month and is by appointment only.

     

    This audiology clinic is not tied to a physician or private practitioner, which gives the company freedom to be its own private practice and see clients as they wish. Some areas for growth include moving away from paper charting and expand on marketing as well as telehealth, nursing home, and pediatric services. At the purchase price of $475,000, a 10% down payment of $47,500 returns $89,320 in the first year after debt payments, which is a 188% return on investment.

    PRICE $475,000 CASH FLOW $150,572

  • Medical Equipment Renter with 1,800+ Patients

    With 18 qualified and knowledgeable employees, this home medical and respiratory equipment provider has been established for more than 50 years! Personnel includes 8 full-time and 10 part-time employees in customer service, billing, delivery, and respiratory; they qualify patients to receive equipment and products that will be covered by the client’s insurance plan. This company provides guidance to clinicians and other professional healthcare workers on how to request equipment and services for patients. With over $600,000 in assets and a 15% profit margin, sales and cash flow grew in 2020 even amidst COVID-19. This company’s primary value proposition is that they help patients and their families navigate the complex health care environment and obtain medical equipment and supplies. They currently have 1,800+ patients with equipment on rent; rental income is approximately 72% of monthly revenue. They have long term relationships with the medical community and are a preferred provider for the country of Santa Clara Health System.

     

    With limited marketing, clients come in from referrals, insurance, and contracting. Some areas of growth include implementing integrated web commerce and telephony systems and home fill oxygen solution for portable tanks, bring billing process in house or negotiate better rates for outsourced billing, expand wound vacuum referrals and lymphedema therapy referrals, and explore telemedicine remote monitoring services for Medicare patients.

     

    The two owners are planning for retirement and have set no specific time frame for involvement but anticipate some form of personal service agreements and/or W2 employment for undetermined length of time after the transaction. They want a successful transition to ensure clients remain with the company long term.

    PRICE $1,650,000 CASH FLOW $432,448

  • Concrete Landscape Edging in KC – 53% Profit Margin

    With nearly 100% of their work coming from referrals and word of mouth, this decorative concrete installer and specialty garden retailer has seen continued growth since 2016!  With a 53% profit margin in 2020 and a 45% profit margin in 2019, this company designs, installs, and maintains a niche, in demand, and high utility concrete product while also selling and installing specialty garden products related to their other work. 55% of revenues coming from concrete installation, 39% from retail, and the other 6% from subcontracting add-on services that utilize local landscapers and contractors, they have a well-established product line to supply the growing, and legal medical cannabis industry that has a huge potential for growth. Already in March of 2021, YTD retail sales revenue is up 180% and net income is up over $39,000. A very small team of employees has maintained these high margins with a low labor cost. This company has over 2,000 residential concrete clients and thousands of retail store clients, including high repeat clientele. This company closes more than 95% of estimates they perform. This company has strong cash flow and does not have any issues collecting payment, resulting in zero A/R.

     

    The company has many years of experience in a niche specialty growing supplies industry  and has relationships with major vendors and distributors. They are well known for their expertise in this growing specialty industry. This retail category has a huge untapped potential as medical marijuana has just become legal in Missouri. This portion of the business has   exponential growth potential and could possibly be spun off into its own entity with multiple locations as the industry evolves. Also, by adding equipment, personnel and advertising , the concrete side of the business could easily be doubled or tripled with the leadership of a motivated buyer.

     

    At the purchase price of $1,605,000, a 12.5% down payment of $200,625  returns $244,222, which is a 122% return on investment in the first year!

    PRICE $1,605,000 CASH FLOW $449,474

  • Stone & Tile Cleaning, Sealing, and Polishing Services in Phoenix

    This business has over 1,600 active clients in the Phoenix Metro and low overhead costs! Established in 2013, this full-service stone cleaning, honing, polishing, and repair company has $115K in assets including 2 vans equipped with truck mounted hot water extraction equipment, high-speed weighted buffers, tools, and supplies. Two efficient technicians manage the entire on-site workload which involves cleaning, sealing, polishing, honing, stripping, repair, and treatment for all-natural stones as well as tile and carpet cleaning. The staff also includes a manager, an administrator/salesperson, and an overseer of the financials. All work is done for high-end homeowners, commercial businesses, hotels, banks, condominiums, or anyone with natural stone surfaces within the Phoenix Metro area. 

     

    The business operates from one warehouse that is not open to the public. They do utilize a virtual office when it is needed, but operations can be run remotely with ease. The team may be lean but is incredibly effective in running the business day-to-day. The owner currently handles scheduling and operations.

     

    This business has superior social media reviews, an excellent reputation, high quality services, and a well-trained team in place. Revenue growth would certainly be obtained by advertising, infusing capital into an additional van to increase capacity, or maximizing current assets with extended hours to generate additional income. Priced at $615,000, a 10% down payment of $61,500 returns $107,139 in the first year after debt payments – a 174% return on investment!

    PRICE $615,000 CASH FLOW $214,197

  • Omaha Childcare Center – 12k sq. ft. Facility

    With an increasing net income year after year, even in COVID-19, and with a continued high profit margin, this stand-alone childcare facility serves children from 6 weeks to 6 years and older. This childcare specializes in an all-inclusive enrichment, aiming to create a well-rounded learning experience. Investing over $13,200 in curriculum and with a curriculum specialist on staff, there are weekly learning curriculum which involves areas of STEM, music, art and social interaction, there are age appropriate so that all ages can participate.

     

    The current owner is 95% absentee and operates the business remotely with their current responsibilities only including finances and payroll. The staff of 19 employees (15FT and 4PT) includes a Director who runs the day-to-day operations, an Assistant Director, a Curriculum Director, and Teachers.

     

    Located in a 12,000 square foot free-standing building that includes an activity center, lunchroom, 8 separate classrooms, playground, multi-use area, the center is licensed for 125, and has a current attendance of 75-90 children and a capacity of 150. Title XX makes up 60% of enrollments.

     

    With an excellent reputation in the community, this full-scale daycare pulls from a variety of nearby premium schools.  Transportation to and from school is provided, and school-aged children can enroll for summer camp and attend full-day childcare on school holidays and snow days.

    PRICE $705,000 CASH FLOW $162,661

  • Renowned Beverly Hills Fashion Boutique

    This high-end fashion boutique in Beverly Hills is extremely well-known in the industry and has several long-standing customers! Their product line includes the latest European trends imported directly from designers and manufacturers, catering to their clientele of refined, sophisticated women. National and International customers travel to the store to purchase entire wardrobes in one visit. A strong recurring local client base knows this boutique will have new and fresh clothing and accessories year-round. The owners travel to Milan twice per year for Fashion Week to place their orders for the upcoming season. They have been extraordinarily creative in recent months, offering to visit homes of local clients with their rolling racks, sending photos to national and international clients to choose from & shipping their items, and choosing items for long-standing clientele.

    The owners handle buying, pricing, inventory, and bookkeeping tasks. The full-time store manager/assistant buyer has been on staff for 13 years and has vast knowledge of the vendors, products, and client base. The team is rounded out by one full-time sales & display person. 

    With exclusivity on several high-end collections, the store is well-known to designers and manufacturers and has long-term relationships with many vendors. The boutique has not tapped into online sales, which would be a tremendous opportunity for revenue growth. Increasing advertising efforts and expanding their product line to include menswear would also undoubtedly add to their customer base.

    PRICE $2,100,000 CASH FLOW $533,013

Franchise (2)

  • Management of Residential & Commercial Improvement Projects

    With little to no overhead and a 129% return on investment, this well-established company offers one-stop project management services for residential, commercial, and government clients. This business has been serving Seattle and surrounding areas since 2004, launching as a franchise in 2019 to become more community-focused; offering expert training and support for all operational aspects of the business, their company goal is 100% franchisee satisfaction. Outsourcing all facility improvements, the current team  includes 4 Project Managers, 1 Sales Representative, and 1 Project Team Admin. All hands-on work is completed by subcontractors, reducing the need for large equipment investments, inventory storage, or a large team. This asset-light company uses digital management programs to manage and execute projects, keeping up-front costs down and profit margins up. The current owner does some project management, along with oversight of operations.

     

    With a well-established clientele, the company specializes in the management of construction projects which includes roofing, concrete or asphalt, turf installation, landscape construction, and snow removal.  Aside from snow removal, most services are large ticket construction services such as outdoor living spaces, concrete projects, repaving parking lots, or landscape construction.  They also provide Coronavirus Protective Services, including interior & exterior sanitation, physical barrier installation, board-up services, emergency electrical services, and emergency plumbing services.

    Great growth is possible through networking and building the customer base, targeted advertising, or expanding the territory as allowed. All territories can be managed with a team of four or less, and with minimal office space per territory.

    PRICE $5,300,000 CASH FLOW $1,533,254

  • $80,000 Discount for 2 Location Café with Absentee Owner

    With an absentee Owner and a General Manager in place at both locations, this double-location salad & sandwich café serves up soups, salads, sandwiches, and wraps for a consistent lunch crowd daily. This restaurant also bakes fresh bread, muffins, cakes, and cookies every morning. With each 4,200 sq. ft. location positioned amid shopping centers and near office buildings, the café is a perfect breakfast and lunch stop for shoppers, businesspeople, and area residents. With the Westroads Area location at $175K and the West Omaha location at $125K, a buyer will receive a $80K discount upon buying both at $220K. Assets include 2 catering vans, large ovens, mixers, walk-in coolers, restaurant equipment, furniture, and fixtures. There are 20-25 people on staff at each café location; along with the GM, there is an Assistant Manager, 1-2 Shift Supervisors, 2 baristas, 1 order taker, 1 sandwich maker, 2 salad/soup staff, 1 food runner, 2 cashiers, 1 baker, 2 bussers, 1 catering staff, 1 dish washer, and 1 food prep staff. There is also 1 bread maker and 1 bulk dough maker; all bread for both locations is baked at Westroads Area location each morning and transferred to the second store.

     Menu options include breakfast favorites such as omelets, quiche, breakfast wraps, and fresh baked muffins, cinnamon rolls, and croissants. Lunch options consist of soups, signature salads, panini & flatbread sandwiches, and wraps, all made-to-order with fresh ingredients in front of the customer. Catering and online ordering are offered, with Door Dash, GrubHub, and Uber Eats available for home delivery.

     Sales have maintained at $1.5M-$1.6M at each location in 2020; a new owner could adjust pricing to increase revenue, as well as promoting online orders and home delivery. Adding keto bread as a menu option would appeal to the growing number of low-carb and keto dieters.

     

    PRICE $220,000 CASH FLOW $70,404

Thinking of Selling?
When selecting an M&A firm, please use the following Scorecard: click here for our M&A Scorecard


The Firm is not a real estate brokerage and therefore the staff will not handle any aspect of the lease, sale or purchase of real estate.